Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Operations Research

911 missions · 537 completed

The discipline of applying mathematical analysis to complex decision problems in operations: allocating scarce resources, scheduling, routing, inventory, and the design of service and production systems. Drawing on mathematical programming, stochastic modeling, queueing, simulation, and game-theoretic reasoning, it seeks policies that perform provably well in systems shaped by constraints, congestion, and uncertainty.

Missions

Open374Completed537All911
🏆Completed
Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

An Interactive Weighted Tchebycheff Procedure for Multiple Objective Programming I: In the Finite Case the Augmented Weighted Tchebycheff Program Characterizes the Nondominated SetResearch Paper

Motivation

A decision problem with several conflicting objectives, such as cost, risk and service level, has no single optimum. What it has is a set of nondominated outcomes: those that cannot be improved in one objective without being worsened in another. Interactive methods of multiple objective programming search this set with a decision-maker, and at each step they need a computational device that returns nondominated outcomes and can return any of them.

The classical device, maximizing a weighted sum of the objectives, fails the second requirement. On a nonconvex or discrete outcome set it only reaches the supported nondominated points, those on the boundary of the convex hull, and misses the rest (see, e.g., Boyd and Vandenberghe, Convex Optimization, §4.7.4, where the weighted-sum approach is shown to be sufficient but not necessary for Pareto optimality). Steuer and Choo (Math. Programming 26 (1983) 326–344) replaced the weighted sum by a weighted Tchebycheff distance to an ideal point, augmented by a small linear term. Their procedure became one of the standard interactive methods of the field, and the augmented Tchebycheff scalarization is now a standard tool in multiobjective integer programming and in the generation of nondominated sets.

Timeline, as recorded in the paper's own references. Dinkelbach and Dürr (1972) showed, in the linear case, that among the minimizers of a weighted Tchebycheff program there is always a nondominated one (the paper's Theorem 3.1 extends this to the discrete case). Bowman (Lecture Notes in Economics and Mathematical Systems, as cited by the paper) related the Tchebycheff norm to the efficient frontier of multiple-criteria problems. Choo and Atkins (Computers and Operations Research 7, 1980) and Choo's dissertation (1980) developed interactive weighted Tchebycheff algorithms. Steuer and Choo (1983) added the augmentation term ρ eT(z∗−z)\rho\,e^{\mathsf T}(z^*-z)ρeT(z∗−z), gave an explicit choice of the weights and of ρ\rhoρ in the discrete case, and proved that the resulting program characterizes the nondominated set exactly (Theorem 3.7).

Setting

There are k≥1k \ge 1k≥1 objectives to be maximized. The set of attainable criterion vectors is a finite set Z⊂RkZ \subset \mathbb R^kZ⊂Rk (in the paper, ZZZ is the image of a discrete feasible set SSS under the objectives f1,…,fkf_1,\dots,f_kf1​,…,fk​). A vector zzz dominates zˉ\bar zzˉ if zi≥zˉiz_i \ge \bar z_izi​≥zˉi​ for all iii and zi>zˉiz_i > \bar z_izi​>zˉi​ for at least one iii. The nondominated set N⊆ZN \subseteq ZN⊆Z consists of the zˉ∈Z\bar z \in Zzˉ∈Z that no z∈Zz \in Zz∈Z dominates.

An ideal criterion vector z∗∈Rkz^* \in \mathbb R^kz∗∈Rk has coordinates zi∗=max⁡z∈Zzi+εiz^*_i = \max_{z\in Z} z_i + \varepsilon_izi∗​=maxz∈Z​zi​+εi​ with εi≥0\varepsilon_i \ge 0εi​≥0, where εi\varepsilon_iεi​ must be strictly positive if (i) more than one nondominated vector maximizes objective iii, or (ii) the only nondominated vector maximizing objective iii also maximizes another objective.

Weights range over the simplex Λˉ={λ∈Rk∣λi≥0, ∑iλi=1}\bar\Lambda = \{\lambda \in \mathbb R^k \mid \lambda_i \ge 0,\ \sum_i \lambda_i = 1\}Λˉ={λ∈Rk∣λi​≥0, ∑i​λi​=1}. For a scalar ρ\rhoρ the augmented weighted Tchebycheff program is

min⁡ α+ρ eT(z∗−z)s.t.α≥λi(zi∗−zi), 1≤i≤k,z∈Z,\min\ \alpha + \rho\, e^{\mathsf T}(z^* - z) \quad\text{s.t.}\quad \alpha \ge \lambda_i (z^*_i - z_i),\ 1 \le i \le k,\quad z \in Z,min α+ρeT(z∗−z)s.t.α≥λi​(zi∗​−zi​), 1≤i≤k,z∈Z,

where eee is the vector of ones; at a fixed zzz its value is max⁡iλi(zi∗−zi)+ρ eT(z∗−z)\max_i \lambda_i(z^*_i - z_i) + \rho\,e^{\mathsf T}(z^*-z)maxi​λi​(zi∗​−zi​)+ρeT(z∗−z).

For zp∈Zz^p \in Zzp∈Z the paper defines weights λp\lambda^pλp by (b): λip∝1/(zi∗−zip)\lambda^p_i \propto 1/(z^*_i - z^p_i)λip​∝1/(zi∗​−zip​), normalized to sum to one, when zip≠zi∗z^p_i \ne z^*_izip​=zi∗​ for all iii; otherwise λp\lambda^pλp puts weight 111 on the coordinates where zip=zi∗z^p_i = z^*_izip​=zi∗​ and 000 elsewhere. With αpq=max⁡iλip(zi∗−ziq)\alpha_{pq} = \max_i \lambda^p_i (z^*_i - z^q_i)αpq​=maxi​λip​(zi∗​−ziq​) it sets

ρ=12min⁡zi∈N, zj∈Z{αij−αiieT(zj−zi)  ∣  eT(zj−zi)>0}.(3.8)\rho = \tfrac12 \min_{z^i \in N,\ z^j \in Z}\Big\{\frac{\alpha_{ij} - \alpha_{ii}}{e^{\mathsf T}(z^j - z^i)} \;\Big|\; e^{\mathsf T}(z^j - z^i) > 0\Big\}. \tag{3.8}ρ=21​zi∈N, zj∈Zmin​{eT(zj−zi)αij​−αii​​​eT(zj−zi)>0}.(3.8)

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.7

For every zp∈Zz^p \in Zzp∈Z,

zp∈N  ⟺  ∃λ∈Λˉ  ∀z∈Z: max⁡iλi(zi∗−zip)+ρ eT(z∗−zp)≤max⁡iλi(zi∗−zi)+ρ eT(z∗−z),z^p \in N \iff \exists \lambda \in \bar\Lambda\ \ \forall z \in Z:\ \max_i \lambda_i(z^*_i - z^p_i) + \rho\, e^{\mathsf T}(z^*-z^p) \le \max_i \lambda_i(z^*_i - z_i) + \rho\, e^{\mathsf T}(z^*-z),zp∈N⟺∃λ∈Λˉ  ∀z∈Z: imax​λi​(zi∗​−zip​)+ρeT(z∗−zp)≤imax​λi​(zi∗​−zi​)+ρeT(z∗−z),

with ρ\rhoρ from (3.8). One coefficient ρ\rhoρ, computed from ZZZ and z∗z^*z∗ alone, works for the whole nondominated set.

Milestones, in the order of the paper

  1. Theorem 3.1. For any λ∈Λˉ\lambda \in \bar\Lambdaλ∈Λˉ, some minimizer of the (unaugmented) weighted Tchebycheff program over ZZZ is nondominated.
  2. Lemma 3.2 (corrected). For zp∈Nz^p \in Nzp∈N and zq∈Zz^q \in Zzq∈Z with zq≠zpz^q \ne z^pzq=zp and zq≰zpz^q \not\le z^pzq≤zp, zqz^qzq lies outside the level set Φ(αpp)\Phi(\alpha_{pp})Φ(αpp​).
  3. Lemma 3.3 (corrected). Under the same hypotheses, αpp<αpq\alpha_{pp} < \alpha_{pq}αpp​<αpq​.
  4. ρp>0\rho_p > 0ρp​>0, the first step of the proof of Theorem 3.4, for the single-vector coefficient ρp\rho_pρp​ of (3.6).
  5. Theorem 3.4. Each zp∈Nz^p \in Nzp∈N is the unique minimizer of the augmented program with weights λp\lambda^pλp and coefficient ρp\rho_pρp​.
  6. Corollary 3.9. The same with the common ρ\rhoρ of (3.8), and λp∈Λˉ\lambda^p \in \bar\Lambdaλp∈Λˉ.

Printed Lemmas 3.2 and 3.3 are false. For Z={(5,3),(5,1),(1,10)}Z = \{(5,3), (5,1), (1,10)\}Z={(5,3),(5,1),(1,10)} and z∗=(5,10)z^* = (5,10)z∗=(5,10), which is ideal with ε=0\varepsilon = 0ε=0, the nondominated vector zp=(5,3)z^p = (5,3)zp=(5,3) has λp=(1,0)\lambda^p = (1,0)λp=(1,0) and αpp=0\alpha_{pp} = 0αpp​=0, while the dominated vector zq=(5,1)z^q = (5,1)zq=(5,1) lies in Φ(0)={z∣z1≥5}\Phi(0) = \{z \mid z_1 \ge 5\}Φ(0)={z∣z1​≥5} and has αpq=0\alpha_{pq} = 0αpq​=0. The proof's second case assumes that only zpz^pzp reaches zj∗z^*_jzj∗​ in coordinate jjj, but the ε\varepsilonε-rule constrains nondominated vectors only. The mission states both lemmas with the added hypothesis zq≰zpz^q \not\le z^pzq≤zp, under which they hold; the milestone texts are the printed ones. Theorems 3.4, 3.7 and Corollary 3.9 are unaffected, since for zq≤zpz^q \le z^pzq≤zp, zq≠zpz^q \ne z^pzq=zp the augmentation term separates zqz^qzq from zpz^pzp on its own. Hypothesis (a) of the paper also contains the misprint "zq≠zqz^q \ne z^qzq=zq" for zq≠zpz^q \ne z^pzq=zp.

Significance

Theorem 3.7 says that the augmented weighted Tchebycheff program, with a computable ρ\rhoρ, is an exact scalarization of the discrete multiple objective program. It returns only nondominated vectors (unlike the plain Tchebycheff program, whose optima can be weakly dominated) and it can return every nondominated vector, including unsupported ones (unlike weighted sums). Corollary 3.9 adds that each nondominated vector is the unique optimum for a suitable weight, so it is found even by a solver that stops at the first optimum. These facts underlie the interactive Tchebycheff procedure of the paper's §5 and a large body of later work on generating nondominated sets of multiobjective integer programs.

The results are proved in the paper; to our knowledge none has been machine-checked. The mission produces a checked version with the two lemmas of the paper's proof chain corrected, a precise treatment of the ideal-vector rule, and an explicit ρ\rhoρ. Alternative proofs, for instance one for the goal that avoids the explicit ρ\rhoρ of (3.8), are welcome.

Difficulty

The ⇐ direction is short. The work is in ⇒: the explicit weights λp\lambda^pλp must be shown to lie in Λˉ\bar\LambdaΛˉ and to make zpz^pzp strictly better than every competitor that is not below it. Both depend on the ε\varepsilonε-rule for z∗z^*z∗, whose role is subtle: it forbids two coordinates of a nondominated vector from reaching z∗z^*z∗, and forbids two nondominated vectors from sharing a coordinate equal to zj∗z^*_jzj∗​, but it says nothing about dominated vectors. The paper's own argument overlooks exactly those dominated vectors, so a proof that follows the printed Lemma 3.2 literally will fail; the gap is closed only by combining the corrected lemma with the augmentation term. Choosing a single ρ\rhoρ for all of NNN also requires that every quotient in (3.8) be strictly positive.

Formalization scope

Criterion vectors are Fin k → ℝ (objective indices 0,…,k−10,\dots,k-10,…,k−1), ZZZ is a Finset, and k≥1k \ge 1k≥1 is imposed as [NeZero k]. The decision set SSS, the objectives fif_ifi​ and the program variable α\alphaα are eliminated: the programs are stated over ZZZ, and α\alphaα is replaced by its minimal value max⁡iλi(zi∗−zi)\max_i \lambda_i(z^*_i - z_i)maxi​λi​(zi∗​−zi​). The programs use zi∗−ziz^*_i - z_izi∗​−zi​ without absolute values, as printed; on ZZZ this equals the metric's ∣zi∗−zi∣|z^*_i - z_i|∣zi∗​−zi​∣ when z∗z^*z∗ is ideal. "zzz minimizes the program" means that zzz minimizes the value over ZZZ, and "uniquely minimizes" means that every other element of ZZZ has a strictly larger value. Λˉ\bar\LambdaΛˉ is Mathlib's stdSimplex ℝ (Fin k).

The ideal vector is encoded with its full ε\varepsilonε-rule, not as "z∗>zz^* > zz∗>z for all z∈Zz \in Zz∈Z"; the latter would exclude the paper's case where zpz^pzp touches z∗z^*z∗ in one coordinate. The minima in (3.6) and (3.8) can range over empty sets (e.g. Z=N={zp}Z = N = \{z^p\}Z=N={zp}); the paper assigns them no value, and the formalization sets ρp\rho_pρp​, ρ\rhoρ to 111 then. A value of 000 would make the goal's ⇒ direction false, so no formalization may rely on Lean's default for an empty minimum. Theorem 3.1 is stated for an arbitrary reference vector z∗z^*z∗, since it needs no ideal-vector hypothesis. The paper's "Let NNN be finite" in Theorem 3.7 is taken as "ZZZ finite", which is what (3.8) and the proof require.

A trivializing formalization would take ρ=0\rho = 0ρ=0 or leave λ\lambdaλ unconstrained; both are excluded, since ρ\rhoρ is the specific value (3.8) and λ\lambdaλ ranges over Λˉ\bar\LambdaΛˉ.

The definitions (dominance, NNN, ideal vector, Tchebycheff values, Φ\PhiΦ, the weights and coefficients of §3) are reusable for the continuous and polyhedral cases of the paper's §4 and for other scalarization results. Contributions of proofs of any milestone are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. E. Steuer and E.-U. Choo, An Interactive Weighted Tchebycheff Procedure for Multiple Objective Programming, Mathematical Programming 26 (1983) 326–344. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02591870
  • W. Dinkelbach and W. Dürr, Effizienzaussagen bei Ersatzprogrammen zum Vektormaximumproblem, in: R. Henn, H. P. Künzi and H. Schubert (eds.), Operations Research Verfahren XII, Anton Hain, Meisenheim, 1972, 117–123 (reference [4] of the paper; no online version known).
  • V. J. Bowman, On the Relationship of the Tchebycheff Norm and the Efficient Frontier of Multiple-Criteria Objectives, Lecture Notes in Economics and Mathematical Systems, Springer (reference [1] of the paper).
  • E.-U. Choo and D. R. Atkins, An Interactive Algorithm for Multicriteria Programming, Computers and Operations Research 7 (1980) 81–87 (reference [3] of the paper).
  • S. Boyd and L. Vandenberghe, Convex Optimization, Cambridge University Press, 2004, §4.7.4. https://web.stanford.edu/~boyd/cvxbook/
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Disjunctive Programming VIII: Nonlinear Higher-Dimensional RepresentationsTextbook

Motivation

Chapter 2's convex-hull machinery gives an exact, finitely-generated linear description of a disjunctive set's convex hull, but for a mixed 0-1 program with ppp binary variables that description lives in a space with roughly pnpnpn auxiliary variables — one full lift per disjunction. This chapter surveys the alternative nonlinear higher-dimensional constructions that several authors proposed for the same target, conv(K0)\mathrm{conv}(K_0)conv(K0​): multiplying the constraint system by products of xjx_jxj​ and 1−xj1-x_j1−xj​ and linearizing the resulting quadratic terms, rather than disjoining and projecting one variable at a time. Two such constructions — Lovász and Schrijver's "cones of matrices" lift N(K)N(K)N(K), and Sherali and Adams's hierarchy KtK_tKt​ — both converge to the integer hull, and the chapter's central point is that both convergence proofs reduce, after all the nonlinear machinery is stripped away, to results already established by disjunctive programming's own one-variable-at-a-time convexification (Theorem 2.1, specialized here to Theorem 7.1, and the sequential-convexifiability theorem of Chapter 3).

Setting

K:={x∈Rn:Ax≥b, x≥0, xj≤1, j=1,…,p}={x:A~x≥b~}K := \{x \in \mathbb R^n : Ax \ge b,\ x \ge 0,\ x_j \le 1,\ j=1,\dots,p\} = \{x : \tilde A x \ge \tilde b\}K:={x∈Rn:Ax≥b, x≥0, xj​≤1, j=1,…,p}={x:A~x≥b~} is the LP relaxation of a mixed 0-1 program with ppp of its nnn variables 0-1 constrained, and K0:=K∩{xj∈{0,1}, j=1,…,p}K_0 := K \cap \{x_j \in \{0,1\},\ j=1,\dots,p\}K0​:=K∩{xj​∈{0,1}, j=1,…,p} its feasible set. Pj(K)P_j(K)Pj​(K) (Section 7.1) multiplies A~x≥b~\tilde A x \ge \tilde bA~x≥b~ by (1−xj)(1-x_j)(1−xj​) and xjx_jxj​, linearizes yi:=xixjy_i := x_ix_jyi​:=xi​xj​ and xj:=xj2x_j := x_j^2xj​:=xj2​, and projects onto xxx; iterating over a coordinate sequence gives Pi1,…,it(K)P_{i_1,\dots,i_t}(K)Pi1​,…,it​​(K). N(K)N(K)N(K) (Section 7.2, Lovász-Schrijver) instead linearizes with a single symmetric matrix YYY (Yij=Yji=xixjY_{ij} = Y_{ji} = x_ix_jYij​=Yji​=xi​xj​ for every pair) before projecting, and iterates as Nt(K):=N(Nt−1(K))N^t(K) := N(N^{t-1}(K))Nt(K):=N(Nt−1(K)). KtK_tKt​ (Section 7.3, Sherali-Adams) multiplies by every product of ttt literals ∏j∈J1xj∏j∈J2(1−xj)\prod_{j\in J_1}x_j\prod_{j\in J_2}(1-x_j)∏j∈J1​​xj​∏j∈J2​​(1−xj​) (∣J1∪J2∣=t|J_1\cup J_2|=t∣J1​∪J2​∣=t), linearizes each resulting monomial with a fresh "moment" variable, and projects.

Formalization targets

Theorem 7.6 (goal) — the Sherali-Adams hierarchy reaches the integer hull

Kp=conv(K0).K_p = \mathrm{conv}(K_0).Kp​=conv(K0​).

The chain of results building toward it

Theorem 7.1 (Pj(K)P_j(K)Pj​(K) equals the one-variable convex hull, a special case of Theorem 2.1), Theorem 7.2 (iterating PjP_jPj​ over a fixed sequence reaches the hull of imposing 0/10/10/1 on all of them), Corollary 7.3 (iterating over every 0-1 index reaches conv(K0)\mathrm{conv}(K_0)conv(K0​)), Theorem 7.4 (N(K)⊆Pj(K)N(K) \subseteq P_j(K)N(K)⊆Pj​(K) for every jjj), Theorem 7.5 (iterating NNN over ppp steps reaches conv(K0)\mathrm{conv}(K_0)conv(K0​), by the same containment), and Theorem 7.7 (Kt⊆P1,…,t(K)K_t \subseteq P_{1,\dots,t}(K)Kt​⊆P1,…,t​(K), proved by a genuine induction re-deriving every valid inequality of P1,…,t(K)P_{1,\dots,t}(K)P1,…,t​(K) from (NLt)(NL_t)(NLt​)'s own rows).

Significance

The results themselves. This chapter is disjunctive programming's account of why three independently-developed convexification hierarchies — its own lift-and-project, Lovász-Schrijver, and Sherali-Adams — all reach the same integer hull: not by coincidence, but because each one's convergence proof is, at bottom, a disguised instance of the book's own Theorem 2.1 and Chapter 3 machinery. This is part of what situates disjunctive programming as the unifying framework behind several major lift-and-project hierarchies used throughout integer programming.

Formalizing it. No object in this mission exists on the platform prior to it or in Mathlib. This mission restates 03-sequential-convex's and 02a-convex-hull's vocabulary locally (per the series convention that a draft mission cannot import another draft mission's definitions), specialized throughout to the split disjunction xj∈{0,1}x_j \in \{0,1\}xj​∈{0,1}.

Difficulty

The chapter's own account of the Sherali-Adams construction (Section 7.3) is narrative rather than displaying an explicit linear system for (NLt)(NL_t)(NLt​), unlike every other construction in this chapter (contrast eq. (7.1) and eq. (7.4), both displayed explicitly) — Step 1 says only "multiply A~x≥b~\tilde Ax \ge \tilde bA~x≥b~ with every product of the form ∏j∈J1xj⋅∏j∈J2(1−xj)\prod_{j\in J_1}x_j \cdot \prod_{j\in J_2}(1-x_j)∏j∈J1​​xj​⋅∏j∈J2​​(1−xj​)." Deriving the actual linear system this multiplication produces requires expanding every (1−xj)(1-x_j)(1−xj​) factor via inclusion-exclusion over S⊆J2S \subseteq J_2S⊆J2​ before the monomials can be linearized — a real, if mechanical, derivation step this mission had to carry out itself (RowNLt, see MODERATION_NOTES.md) rather than transcribe from a displayed equation. Theorem 7.7's own proof is a genuine argument (an induction re-deriving a valid inequality of P1,…,t(K)P_{1,\dots,t}(K)P1,…,t​(K) from (NLt)(NL_t)(NLt​)'s rows layer by layer), not a restatement, so it is included as a milestone with real mathematical content rather than assumed.

Correcting BRIEF.md. The brief's "Recommended goal theorem" section mislabels Theorem 7.6 as the Lovász-Schrijver result "Kp=conv(K0)K^p = \mathrm{conv}(K_0)Kp=conv(K0​)" — cross-checked directly against the PDF, Theorem 7.6 (p. 95, PDF 101) is stated [112] Kp = conv(K0), cited to Sherali and Adams, appearing immediately after Section 7.3 introduces KtK_tKt​. The actual Lovász-Schrijver iteration-reaches-the-hull result, cited [99], is Theorem 7.5 (Np(K) = conv(K0)), formalized in this mission as a milestone (lovasz_schrijver_reaches_hull) rather than the goal. See STATUS.md.

Formalization scope

Three distinct convexification operators are kept fully distinguishable throughout, as BRIEF.md warns: Pj/IteratedSplit (one-variable-at-a-time, Section 7.1, Def_..._Basic), NOp/MK (Lovász-Schrijver, Section 7.2, Def_..._Lifts), and KtSet/IsXt (Sherali-Adams, Section 7.3, Def_..._Lifts) — no shared abbreviation or lemma conflates their defining predicates, even though all three converge to the same hull.

Nt(K)N^t(K)Nt(K)'s iteration (Theorem 7.5) is formalized via a dependent family of representations A t, b t for t : Fin (p+1) with a hypothesis relating consecutive steps to NOp's image at the previous step — the same pattern 04-normal-forms's Theorem 4.10 uses — since each successive Nt(K)N^t(K)Nt(K) genuinely has a different, larger ambient constraint system, not a fixed matrix's power.

Theorem 7.7 is stated for an arbitrary ttt-subset S⊆N′S \subseteq N'S⊆N′ rather than the literal prefix {1,…,t}\{1,\dots,t\}{1,…,t} the book's own statement uses (its own proof, by induction, treats an arbitrary inequality of P1,…,t(K)P_{1,\dots,t}(K)P1,…,t​(K) with no dependence on the prefix's specific ordering), which is what the goal theorem's proof, applied at S=N′S = N'S=N′, actually needs.

The Bienstock-Zuckerberg results quoted narratively in Section 7.5 ("Theorem 1"/"Theorem 2", [43]/[44]) are out-of-cone: the book itself presents them only as a survey of a further lift operator, under their own source papers' numbering, not as Balas's own numbered results, and does not restate their proofs.

Selected references

  • E. Balas, Disjunctive Programming, Springer, 2018. DOI: 10.1007/978-3-030-00148-3, Chapter 7.
  • L. Lovász, A. Schrijver, Cones of matrices and set-functions and 0-1 optimization, SIAM Journal on Optimization 1 (1991), 166-190 (cited in the text as [99], the origin of the N(K)N(K)N(K) construction and Theorems 7.4-7.5).
  • H.D. Sherali, W.P. Adams, A hierarchy of relaxations between the continuous and convex hull representations for zero-one programming problems, SIAM Journal on Discrete Mathematics 3 (1990), 411-430 (cited in the text as [112], the origin of the KtK_tKt​ construction and Theorem 7.6).
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationMachine LearningOptimal Transport+2·Captain: mikedeng1

Distributionally Robust Logistic Regression II: Worst- and Best-Case Misclassification Risks over a Wasserstein Ball Are Linear ProgramsResearch Paper

Motivation

A logistic regression model is fitted on finitely many samples, and the quantity a practitioner cares about is the misclassification risk of the fitted classifier on new data. Its empirical counterpart, the training error, is biased downwards, and classical generalization bounds give it an additive margin that depends on a complexity measure of the model class rather than on the data at hand.

Shafieezadeh-Abadeh, Mohajerin Esfahani and Kuhn (NIPS 2015) take a distributionally robust route. They surround the empirical distribution of the training data by a ball of distributions in the Wasserstein metric and, for a given weight vector, compute the largest and the smallest misclassification probability over that ball. Their Theorem 3 shows that both extremes are optimal values of explicit linear programs. Combined with a measure-concentration result for the empirical distribution in the Wasserstein metric (Fournier and Guillin, PTRF 2015), the two values bracket the true risk with a prescribed confidence. The same Wasserstein-ball construction underlies the data-driven optimization framework of Mohajerin Esfahani and Kuhn (Math. Program. 2018).

Setting

Let VVV be the feature space Rn\mathbb R^nRn with an arbitrary norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, and let labels take the values y∈{−1,+1}y\in\{-1,+1\}y∈{−1,+1}. The feature-label space is Ξ=V×{−1,+1}\Xi = V\times\{-1,+1\}Ξ=V×{−1,+1} with points ξ=(x,y)\xi=(x,y)ξ=(x,y). A weight vector β\betaβ acts on features by x↦⟨β,x⟩x\mapsto\langle\beta,x\ranglex↦⟨β,x⟩; its dual norm is ∥β∥∗=sup⁡∥x∥≤1⟨β,x⟩\|\beta\|_* = \sup_{\|x\|\le1}\langle\beta,x\rangle∥β∥∗​=sup∥x∥≤1​⟨β,x⟩.

Metric (Definition 2). For a weight κ>0\kappa>0κ>0,

d((x,y),(x′,y′))=∥x−x′∥+κ ∣y−y′∣/2.d\big((x,y),(x',y')\big) = \|x-x'\| + \kappa\,|y-y'|/2 .d((x,y),(x′,y′))=∥x−x′∥+κ∣y−y′∣/2.

Changing a label costs κ\kappaκ; moving a feature costs its norm distance.

Wasserstein distance (Definition 1). For distributions Q,P\mathbb Q,\mathbb PQ,P on Ξ\XiΞ, W(Q,P)W(\mathbb Q,\mathbb P)W(Q,P) is the infimum of ∫d(ξ,ξ′) Π(dξ,dξ′)\int d(\xi,\xi')\,\Pi(d\xi,d\xi')∫d(ξ,ξ′)Π(dξ,dξ′) over all couplings Π\PiΠ of Q\mathbb QQ and P\mathbb PP. The Wasserstein ball of radius ε≥0\varepsilon\ge0ε≥0 is Bε(P)={Q:W(Q,P)≤ε}\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\mathbb P) = \{\mathbb Q : W(\mathbb Q,\mathbb P)\le\varepsilon\}Bε​(P)={Q:W(Q,P)≤ε}.

Data. Training samples (x^i,y^i)(\hat x_i,\hat y_i)(x^i​,y^​i​), i=1,…,Ni=1,\dots,Ni=1,…,N, define the empirical distribution P^N=1N∑i=1Nδ(x^i,y^i)\hat{\mathbb P}_N = \frac1N\sum_{i=1}^N\delta_{(\hat x_i,\hat y_i)}P^N​=N1​∑i=1N​δ(x^i​,y^​i​)​.

Classifier and risk. Logistic regression models Prob⁡(y∣x)=[1+exp⁡(−y⟨β,x⟩)]−1\operatorname{Prob}(y\mid x) = [1+\exp(-y\langle\beta,x\rangle)]^{-1}Prob(y∣x)=[1+exp(−y⟨β,x⟩)]−1 (eq. (1)). The classifier is fβ(x)=+1f_\beta(x)=+1fβ​(x)=+1 if Prob⁡(+1∣x)>0.5\operatorname{Prob}(+1\mid x)>0.5Prob(+1∣x)>0.5 and −1-1−1 otherwise, and its risk under the data-generating distribution P\mathbb PP is R(β)=P[y≠fβ(x)]\mathfrak R(\beta) = \mathbb P[y\ne f_\beta(x)]R(β)=P[y=fβ​(x)].

Worst- and best-case risks.

Rmax⁡(β)=sup⁡Q∈Bε(P^N)EQ[1{y⟨β,x⟩≤0}],Rmin⁡(β)=inf⁡Q∈Bε(P^N)EQ[1{y⟨β,x⟩<0}].\mathfrak R_{\max}(\beta) = \sup_{\mathbb Q\in\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\hat{\mathbb P}_N)}\mathbb E^{\mathbb Q}\big[\mathbb 1_{\{y\langle\beta,x\rangle\le0\}}\big],\qquad \mathfrak R_{\min}(\beta) = \inf_{\mathbb Q\in\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\hat{\mathbb P}_N)}\mathbb E^{\mathbb Q}\big[\mathbb 1_{\{y\langle\beta,x\rangle<0\}}\big].Rmax​(β)=Q∈Bε​(P^N​)sup​EQ[1{y⟨β,x⟩≤0}​],Rmin​(β)=Q∈Bε​(P^N​)inf​EQ[1{y⟨β,x⟩<0}​].

The worst case counts a nonpositive margin, the best case a strictly negative one.

The linear programs. For data (x^i,y^i)(\hat x_i,\hat y_i)(x^i​,y^​i​), a weight vector β^\hat\betaβ^​ and variables λ∈R\lambda\in\mathbb Rλ∈R, s,r,t∈RNs,r,t\in\mathbb R^Ns,r,t∈RN, program (10a) minimizes λε+1N∑isi\lambda\varepsilon + \frac1N\sum_i s_iλε+N1​∑i​si​ subject to, for every iii,

1−riy^i⟨β^,x^i⟩≤si,1+tiy^i⟨β^,x^i⟩−λκ≤si,ri∥β^∥∗≤λ,ti∥β^∥∗≤λ,ri,ti,si≥0.1 - r_i\hat y_i\langle\hat\beta,\hat x_i\rangle\le s_i,\quad 1 + t_i\hat y_i\langle\hat\beta,\hat x_i\rangle - \lambda\kappa\le s_i,\quad r_i\|\hat\beta\|_*\le\lambda,\quad t_i\|\hat\beta\|_*\le\lambda,\quad r_i,t_i,s_i\ge0 .1−ri​y^​i​⟨β^​,x^i​⟩≤si​,1+ti​y^​i​⟨β^​,x^i​⟩−λκ≤si​,ri​∥β^​∥∗​≤λ,ti​∥β^​∥∗​≤λ,ri​,ti​,si​≥0.

Program (10b) has the same objective and bounds, with the signs of the two margin terms exchanged.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3 (i)–(ii)

For every κ>0\kappa>0κ>0, ε≥0\varepsilon\ge0ε≥0, N≥1N\ge1N≥1, all samples and every weight vector β^\hat\betaβ^​, both programs attain their minima vvv and www, and

Rmax⁡(β^)=v,Rmin⁡(β^)=1−w.\mathfrak R_{\max}(\hat\beta) = v,\qquad \mathfrak R_{\min}(\hat\beta) = 1-w .Rmax​(β^​)=v,Rmin​(β^​)=1−w.

The identities hold for each fixed β^\hat\betaβ^​, so they apply to any β^\hat\betaβ^​ computed from the data.

Milestone: Theorem 3(i) alone

Rmax⁡(β^)\mathfrak R_{\max}(\hat\beta)Rmax​(β^​) equals the minimum of (10a).

Milestones: the confidence clauses

If the training samples are i.i.d. from P\mathbb PP and the radius is such that PN{P∈Bε(P^N)}≥1−η\mathbb P^N\{\mathbb P\in\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\hat{\mathbb P}_N)\}\ge1-\etaPN{P∈Bε​(P^N​)}≥1−η, then for any sample-dependent β^\hat\betaβ^​

PN{R(β^)≤Rmax⁡(β^)}≥1−η,PN{Rmin⁡(β^)≤R(β^)}≥1−η,\mathbb P^N\{\mathfrak R(\hat\beta)\le\mathfrak R_{\max}(\hat\beta)\}\ge1-\eta,\qquad \mathbb P^N\{\mathfrak R_{\min}(\hat\beta)\le\mathfrak R(\hat\beta)\}\ge1-\eta,PN{R(β^​)≤Rmax​(β^​)}≥1−η,PN{Rmin​(β^​)≤R(β^​)}≥1−η, PN{Rmin⁡(β^)≤R(β^)≤Rmax⁡(β^)}≥1−2η.\mathbb P^N\{\mathfrak R_{\min}(\hat\beta)\le\mathfrak R(\hat\beta)\le\mathfrak R_{\max}(\hat\beta)\}\ge1-2\eta .PN{Rmin​(β^​)≤R(β^​)≤Rmax​(β^​)}≥1−2η.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3 replaces an optimization over an infinite-dimensional set of distributions by a linear program with 3N+13N+13N+1 variables and 4N4N4N constraints plus sign constraints. That makes the worst- and best-case misclassification probabilities computable at the scale of the training set, for any norm on the features whose dual norm can be evaluated. With the confidence clauses, the two values are data-driven upper and lower confidence bounds on the out-of-sample risk of the classifier actually deployed, including one fitted on the same data.

Formalizing it. The paper states Theorem 3 without proof in the main text; the argument is deferred to a technical appendix. No part of it is machine-checked. A formal proof needs the evaluation of a worst-case probability of a closed set over a type-1 Wasserstein ball around a discrete distribution, and the analogous best-case probability of an open set. Both are reusable in any Wasserstein-robust treatment of chance constraints or classification error.

Difficulty

The objective 1{y⟨β,x⟩≤0}\mathbf 1_{\{y\langle\beta,x\rangle\le0\}}1{y⟨β,x⟩≤0}​ is neither continuous nor concave, so the duality theorems for Wasserstein balls stated for continuous or Lipschitz losses do not apply directly. Upper semicontinuity of the indicator of a closed set is what matters, and the strict inequality in Rmin⁡\mathfrak R_{\min}Rmin​ has to be handled as the complement of a closed set. The transport cost couples a norm on the features with a discrete label-flip cost, so a sample can reach the misclassification region either by moving its feature to the hyperplane ⟨β^,x⟩=0\langle\hat\beta,x\rangle=0⟨β^​,x⟩=0 or by flipping its label, and the two options interact through the shared budget ε\varepsilonε. Distances to the hyperplane are measured in the given norm and produce the dual norm ∥β^∥∗\|\hat\beta\|_*∥β^​∥∗​. The degenerate weight β^=0\hat\beta=0β^​=0 (every point on the hyperplane) must come out correctly without any division by ∥β^∥∗\|\hat\beta\|_*∥β^​∥∗​.

Formalization scope

The feature space is a finite-dimensional real normed space V with an arbitrary norm, standing for (Rn,∥⋅∥)(\mathbb R^n,\|\cdot\|)(Rn,∥⋅∥); the Euclidean norm is not assumed. A weight vector is a continuous linear functional V →L[ℝ] ℝ, and ∥β^∥∗\|\hat\beta\|_*∥β^​∥∗​ is its operator norm, which is exactly the dual norm. Labels are Bool with an explicit embedding true↦+1\text{true}\mapsto+1true↦+1, false↦−1\text{false}\mapsto-1false↦−1; the metric of Definition 2 is written literally. The Wasserstein distance is ℝ≥0∞-valued, probabilities and expectations of indicators are measure values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], and suprema and infima range exactly over the probability measures in the ball. "min" in (10a)/(10b) is formalized as attainment (IsLeast) of the objective over the feasible set. Samples are indexed by Fin N with N≥1N\ge1N≥1.

The following choices differ from a literal reading of the page:

  • The paper says the risk "can be expressed as" EP[1{y⟨β,x⟩≤0}]\mathbb E^{\mathbb P}[\mathbb 1_{\{y\langle\beta,x\rangle\le0\}}]EP[1{y⟨β,x⟩≤0}​]. This fails on the hyperplane ⟨β,x⟩=0\langle\beta,x\rangle=0⟨β,x⟩=0, where fβ(x)=−1f_\beta(x)=-1fβ​(x)=−1 is correct for y=−1y=-1y=−1. The mission defines R(β)=P[y≠fβ(x)]\mathfrak R(\beta)=\mathbb P[y\ne f_\beta(x)]R(β)=P[y=fβ​(x)] from (1) and includes the true statement EP[1{y⟨β,x⟩<0}]≤R(β)≤EP[1{y⟨β,x⟩≤0}]\mathbb E^{\mathbb P}[\mathbb 1_{\{y\langle\beta,x\rangle<0\}}]\le\mathfrak R(\beta)\le\mathbb E^{\mathbb P}[\mathbb 1_{\{y\langle\beta,x\rangle\le0\}}]EP[1{y⟨β,x⟩<0}​]≤R(β)≤EP[1{y⟨β,x⟩≤0}​] as a helper item.
  • The choice ε=εN(η)\varepsilon=\varepsilon_N(\eta)ε=εN​(η) of (8) and the measure-concentration theorem behind it (Theorem 2) are not formalized. The confidence clauses take their conclusion, PN{P∈Bε(P^N)}≥1−η\mathbb P^N\{\mathbb P\in\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\hat{\mathbb P}_N)\}\ge1-\etaPN{P∈Bε​(P^N​)}≥1−η, as a hypothesis, and "with probability 1−η1-\eta1−η" is read as "with probability at least 1−η1-\eta1−η". The printed level 1−2η1-2\eta1−2η is kept for the two-sided bound.

Swapping the strict and non-strict inequalities in Rmax⁡\mathfrak R_{\max}Rmax​ and Rmin⁡\mathfrak R_{\min}Rmin​, restricting the supremum to measures supported on the sample points, or replacing the ball by a set that excludes non-discrete distributions would each change the theorem. None of these is an acceptable reformulation of the goal.

Useful infrastructure: couplings of a discrete measure with an arbitrary one, the distance from a point to a closed half-space in a general norm, and LP-duality arguments for fractional-knapsack-type programs. Proofs of the helper and confidence items, and any reusable lemma about worst-case probabilities of closed sets over Wasserstein balls, are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Shafieezadeh-Abadeh, P. Mohajerin Esfahani, D. Kuhn, Distributionally Robust Logistic Regression, Advances in Neural Information Processing Systems 28 (NIPS 2015). https://papers.nips.cc/paper/2015/hash/cc1aa436277138f61cda703991069eaf-Abstract.html
  • N. Fournier, A. Guillin, On the rate of convergence in Wasserstein distance of the empirical measure, Probability Theory and Related Fields 162 (2015). https://doi.org/10.1007/s00440-014-0583-7
  • P. Mohajerin Esfahani, D. Kuhn, Data-driven distributionally robust optimization using the Wasserstein metric: performance guarantees and tractable reformulations, Mathematical Programming 171 (2018). https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-017-1172-1
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationMachine LearningOptimal Transport+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Distributionally Robust Logistic Regression I: The Worst-Case Expected Logloss over a Wasserstein Ball Is a Tractable Convex ProgramResearch Paper

Motivation

Logistic regression is among the most widely used classification methods in statistics and machine learning. Its maximum-likelihood estimator minimizes the average logloss on the training data and is known to overfit when data are scarce; practitioners respond with ad hoc regularization, typically a norm penalty on the weight vector. Shafieezadeh-Abadeh, Mohajerin Esfahani and Kuhn (NIPS 2015, arXiv:1509.09259) replace the empirical average by a worst case over all distributions within a Wasserstein ball around the empirical distribution. The resulting model has a finite convex reformulation, contains classical and norm-regularized logistic regression as special cases, and comes with out-of-sample guarantees. It is one of the early instances of Wasserstein distributionally robust optimization in learning, building on the duality theory of Mohajerin Esfahani and Kuhn (Math. Program. 2018, arXiv:1505.05116); the regularization interpretation was later extended to general losses by Shafieezadeh-Abadeh, Kuhn and Mohajerin Esfahani (JMLR 2019, arXiv:1710.10016).

Setting

Let VVV be the feature space Rn\mathbb R^nRn with an arbitrary norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, and let ∥β∥∗=sup⁡∥x∥≤1⟨β,x⟩\|\beta\|_* = \sup_{\|x\|\le1}\langle\beta,x\rangle∥β∥∗​=sup∥x∥≤1​⟨β,x⟩ be the dual norm of a weight vector β\betaβ. Labels are y∈{−1,+1}y\in\{-1,+1\}y∈{−1,+1}, and the feature-label space is Ξ=V×{−1,+1}\Xi = V\times\{-1,+1\}Ξ=V×{−1,+1}. The logloss of β\betaβ at (x,y)(x,y)(x,y) is

lβ(x,y)=log⁡(1+exp⁡(−y⟨β,x⟩)).l_\beta(x,y) = \log\big(1+\exp(-y\langle\beta,x\rangle)\big).lβ​(x,y)=log(1+exp(−y⟨β,x⟩)).

For a label weight κ>0\kappa>0κ>0, the metric of Definition 2 on Ξ\XiΞ is

d((x,y),(x′,y′))=∥x−x′∥+κ ∣y−y′∣/2,d\big((x,y),(x',y')\big) = \|x-x'\| + \kappa\,|y-y'|/2 ,d((x,y),(x′,y′))=∥x−x′∥+κ∣y−y′∣/2,

so that changing a label costs κ\kappaκ. The Wasserstein distance W(Q,P)W(\mathbb Q,\mathbb P)W(Q,P) between probability distributions on Ξ\XiΞ (Definition 1) is the infimum of ∫d(ξ,ξ′) Π(dξ,dξ′)\int d(\xi,\xi')\,\Pi(d\xi,d\xi')∫d(ξ,ξ′)Π(dξ,dξ′) over all couplings Π\PiΠ of Q\mathbb QQ and P\mathbb PP, and Bε(P)={Q:W(Q,P)≤ε}\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\mathbb P) = \{\mathbb Q : W(\mathbb Q,\mathbb P)\le\varepsilon\}Bε​(P)={Q:W(Q,P)≤ε}. Given training samples (x^i,y^i)i=1N(\hat x_i,\hat y_i)_{i=1}^N(x^i​,y^​i​)i=1N​, the empirical distribution is P^N=1N∑iδ(x^i,y^i)\hat{\mathbb P}_N = \frac1N\sum_i\delta_{(\hat x_i,\hat y_i)}P^N​=N1​∑i​δ(x^i​,y^​i​)​, and the distributionally robust logistic regression problem (6) is

J^=inf⁡β sup⁡Q∈Bε(P^N)EQ[lβ(x,y)].\hat J = \inf_\beta\ \sup_{\mathbb Q\in\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\hat{\mathbb P}_N)} \mathbb E^{\mathbb Q}\big[l_\beta(x,y)\big].J^=βinf​ Q∈Bε​(P^N​)sup​EQ[lβ​(x,y)].

Program (7) has variables β\betaβ, λ∈R\lambda\in\mathbb Rλ∈R, s∈RNs\in\mathbb R^Ns∈RN, objective λε+1N∑isi\lambda\varepsilon + \frac1N\sum_i s_iλε+N1​∑i​si​, and constraints lβ(x^i,y^i)≤sil_\beta(\hat x_i,\hat y_i)\le s_ilβ​(x^i​,y^​i​)≤si​, lβ(x^i,−y^i)−λκ≤sil_\beta(\hat x_i,-\hat y_i)-\lambda\kappa\le s_ilβ​(x^i​,−y^​i​)−λκ≤si​ for all iii, and ∥β∥∗≤λ\|\beta\|_*\le\lambda∥β∥∗​≤λ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (tractable reformulation)

For every ε≥0\varepsilon\ge0ε≥0, κ>0\kappa>0κ>0, N≥1N\ge1N≥1 and every norm on the feature space,

inf⁡β sup⁡Q∈Bε(P^N)EQ[lβ]  =  inf⁡{λε+1N∑isi:(β,λ,s) feasible for (7)},\inf_\beta\ \sup_{\mathbb Q\in\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\hat{\mathbb P}_N)}\mathbb E^{\mathbb Q}[l_\beta] \;=\; \inf\Big\{\lambda\varepsilon+\tfrac1N\textstyle\sum_i s_i : (\beta,\lambda,s)\text{ feasible for (7)}\Big\},βinf​ Q∈Bε​(P^N​)sup​EQ[lβ​]=inf{λε+N1​∑i​si​:(β,λ,s) feasible for (7)},

and for ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 the infimum of (7) is attained.

Milestones

  1. §3.1 — the feasible set of (7) is convex.
  2. §2 — for ε=0\varepsilon=0ε=0 the worst-case expected logloss is the empirical average logloss, so (6) reduces to classical logistic regression (2).
  3. Theorem 1 for fixed β\betaβ — sup⁡Q∈Bε(P^N)EQ[lβ]\sup_{\mathbb Q\in\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\hat{\mathbb P}_N)}\mathbb E^{\mathbb Q}[l_\beta]supQ∈Bε​(P^N​)​EQ[lβ​] equals the attained minimum of (7) over (λ,s)(\lambda,s)(λ,s) with β\betaβ fixed.
  4. Remark 2, eq. (9) — at an optimal solution (β^,λ^,s^)(\hat\beta,\hat\lambda,\hat s)(β^​,λ^,s^),
J^=λ^ε+EP^N[lβ^]+1N∑imax⁡{0,y^i⟨β^,x^i⟩−λ^κ}.\hat J = \hat\lambda\varepsilon + \mathbb E^{\hat{\mathbb P}_N}[l_{\hat\beta}] + \tfrac1N\textstyle\sum_i\max\{0,\hat y_i\langle\hat\beta,\hat x_i\rangle-\hat\lambda\kappa\}.J^=λ^ε+EP^N​[lβ^​​]+N1​∑i​max{0,y^​i​⟨β^​,x^i​⟩−λ^κ}.
  1. Remark 1 — as κ→∞\kappa\to\inftyκ→∞ the optimal value of (7) converges to inf⁡βε∥β∥∗+1N∑ilβ(x^i,y^i)\inf_\beta \varepsilon\|\beta\|_* + \frac1N\sum_i l_\beta(\hat x_i,\hat y_i)infβ​ε∥β∥∗​+N1​∑i​lβ​(x^i​,y^​i​).
  2. Theorem 2, implication — if PN{P∈Bε(P^N)}≥1−η\mathbb P^N\{\mathbb P\in\mathbb B_\varepsilon(\hat{\mathbb P}_N)\}\ge1-\etaPN{P∈Bε​(P^N​)}≥1−η, then PN{EP[lβ^]≤J^}≥1−η\mathbb P^N\{\mathbb E^{\mathbb P}[l_{\hat\beta}]\le\hat J\}\ge1-\etaPN{EP[lβ^​​]≤J^}≥1−η.

Significance

Theorem 1 turns a minimax problem over an infinite-dimensional family of distributions into a finite convex program whose size grows linearly in NNN; with the ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​, ℓ2\ell_2ℓ2​ or ℓ∞\ell_\inftyℓ∞​ norm it is a standard exponential-cone or conic program. Remark 1 explains norm-regularized logistic regression as a distributionally robust model: the regularizer is the dual norm of the transport cost on features, and the regularization weight is the radius of the ambiguity set. Remark 2 exposes an additional term that accounts for label noise and vanishes as label changes become prohibitively expensive. Theorem 2 makes the optimal value J^\hat JJ^ a certificate on the out-of-sample logloss whenever the ball contains the true distribution.

The paper's proofs are in a technical appendix and have not been machine-checked. Mathlib contains no Wasserstein distributionally robust duality. This mission produces a formal statement of the reformulation with an arbitrary norm and a label-dependent cost, together with formal versions of the paper's printed consequences of it (Remarks 1 and 2, the ε=0\varepsilon=0ε=0 reduction, and the implication in Theorem 2).

Difficulty

The worst-case expectation ranges over every Borel probability distribution within transport distance ε\varepsilonε of the empirical distribution, including distributions with unbounded support and distributions that move mass across labels. Exhibiting good distributions in the ball shows only that the robust value is at least the value of (7); the reverse inequality must control every distribution in the ball at once, and nothing in the definition of the ball bounds its elements' supports. The obvious simplification, restricting attention to distributions supported on finitely many points, again yields only a one-sided bound unless the supremum is shown to be approached by such distributions. The label term of the metric couples the two label classes, so results for a pure norm cost on the features do not apply directly, and the dual norm enters through an arbitrary norm rather than the Euclidean one.

Formalization scope

  • The feature space is an abstract finite-dimensional real normed space V standing for (Rn,∥⋅∥)(\mathbb R^n,\|\cdot\|)(Rn,∥⋅∥) with an arbitrary norm; weights are continuous linear functionals V →L[ℝ] ℝ, and ∥β∥∗\|\beta\|_*∥β∥∗​ is their operator norm, which is exactly the dual norm. Labels are Bool, embedded as ±1\pm1±1; the label −y-y−y is Boolean negation. The metric of Definition 2 is written literally.
  • The Wasserstein distance is of type 1, valued in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], with couplings ranging over all probability measures on Ξ×Ξ\Xi\times\XiΞ×Ξ with the two prescribed marginals. The ball consists of probability measures.
  • Expectations of the positive logloss are lower Lebesgue integrals in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], and the supremum over the ball is taken there; the optimal value of (7) is the infimum of its (nonnegative) objective over the feasible set, also in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. A Bochner integral, which vanishes on non-integrable functions, would make the worst case trivially finite and is not used.
  • The standing hypotheses are κ>0\kappa>0κ>0, ε≥0\varepsilon\ge0ε≥0, N≥1N\ge1N≥1.
  • Correction. The paper prints "min" in (7) for all ε≥0\varepsilon\ge0ε≥0. At ε=0\varepsilon=0ε=0 the minimum can fail to be attained (V=RV=\mathbb RV=R, N=1N=1N=1, x^1=1\hat x_1=1x^1​=1, y^1=+1\hat y_1=+1y^​1​=+1: the value is 000 but every feasible point has positive objective). The goal states the value identity for ε≥0\varepsilon\ge0ε≥0 and attainment for ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0.
  • Remark 1 is formalized as convergence of optimal values as κ→∞\kappa\to\inftyκ→∞; a metric with κ=∞\kappa=\inftyκ=∞ is not formalized. Only convexity, not tractability, of (7) is stated. The first claim of Theorem 2 (the radius (8) and the light-tail assumption) is not formalized; the confidence of the ball event is a hypothesis of milestone 6.
  • A formalization in which the ball is taken only over distributions supported on the training samples, or in which the label term of the metric is dropped, trivializes the second constraint group of (7) and is ruled out: the ball here contains every Borel probability distribution on Ξ\XiΞ within the prescribed distance.
  • Infrastructure needed and reusable beyond this mission: type-1 optimal transport on product spaces with a label component, couplings and their marginals, and elementary properties of the logloss as a function of β\betaβ. Contributions of such supporting lemmas as independent theorems are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Shafieezadeh-Abadeh, P. Mohajerin Esfahani, D. Kuhn, Distributionally Robust Logistic Regression, Advances in Neural Information Processing Systems 28 (NIPS 2015). https://arxiv.org/abs/1509.09259
  • P. Mohajerin Esfahani, D. Kuhn, Data-driven distributionally robust optimization using the Wasserstein metric: performance guarantees and tractable reformulations, Mathematical Programming 171 (2018). https://arxiv.org/abs/1505.05116
  • N. Fournier, A. Guillin, On the rate of convergence in Wasserstein distance of the empirical measure, Probability Theory and Related Fields 162 (2015). https://arxiv.org/abs/1312.2128
  • S. Shafieezadeh-Abadeh, D. Kuhn, P. Mohajerin Esfahani, Regularization via Mass Transportation, Journal of Machine Learning Research 20 (2019). https://arxiv.org/abs/1710.10016
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsLinear OptimizationOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Disjunctive Programming VI: Extended Formulations for Perfectly Matchable Subgraph PolytopesTextbook

Motivation

Many polytopes that arise from combinatorial optimization problems have no small facet description in their natural variable space, yet become describable by a compact linear system once lifted to a higher-dimensional space of auxiliary variables and projected back down — Chapter 2's own extended formulation of the convex hull of a disjunctive set is one instance of this phenomenon. This chapter turns the idea around: rather than using projection to build a compact formulation, it uses projection to prove integrality of a formulation that is already compact but whose integrality is not obvious from any standard sufficient condition (total unimodularity, balancedness, etc.). The technique is illustrated on three closely related combinatorial polytopes built from perfectly matchable, assignable, and path-decomposable vertex subsets of a graph or digraph — each proved integral by lifting to an edge- or arc-variable space where total unimodularity is easy to check, then projecting.

Setting

For a finite vertex set VVV, the incidence vector of W⊆VW \subseteq VW⊆V is 111 on WWW, 000 elsewhere, and x(S):=∑i∈Sxix(S) := \sum_{i \in S} x_ix(S):=∑i∈S​xi​. A graph G(W)G(W)G(W) has a perfect matching if there is a fixed-point-free involution on WWW respecting adjacency. The PMS (Perfectly Matchable Subgraph) polytope of GGG is conv(X)\mathrm{conv}(X)conv(X) where XXX is the set of incidence vectors of such WWW; N(S):={j∉S:(i,j)∈E for some i∈S}N(S) := \{j \notin S : (i,j) \in E \text{ for some } i \in S\}N(S):={j∈/S:(i,j)∈E for some i∈S}.

For a digraph (V,A)(V,A)(V,A): G(W)G(W)G(W) is assignable if it admits a cycle decomposition (a permutation of WWW respecting arcs), giving the Assignable Subgraph Polytope. For an acyclic digraph with distinguished nodes s,ts,ts,t: G(W∪{s,t})G(W \cup \{s,t\})G(W∪{s,t}) admits an sss-ttt path decomposition if a collection of interior-node-disjoint sss-ttt paths covers it, giving the sss-ttt Path Decomposable Subgraph Polytope over W⊆V∖{s,t}W \subseteq V \setminus \{s,t\}W⊆V∖{s,t}. Γ(S)\Gamma(S)Γ(S) and Γ∗(S)\Gamma^*(S)Γ∗(S) are the corresponding out-neighborhood operators. For an arbitrary graph, c(S)c(S)c(S) counts the connected components of the induced subgraph G(S)G(S)G(S).

Formalization targets

Theorem 5.1 (goal) — the PMS polytope of a bipartite graph

0≤xi≤1 (i∈V),x(V1)−x(V2)=0,x(S)−x(N(S))≤0  (S⊆V1).0 \le x_i \le 1\ (i \in V), \qquad x(V_1) - x(V_2) = 0, \qquad x(S) - x(N(S)) \le 0\ \ (S \subseteq V_1).0≤xi​≤1 (i∈V),x(V1​)−x(V2​)=0,x(S)−x(N(S))≤0  (S⊆V1​).

Theorem 5.2 — the Assignable Subgraph Polytope

0≤xi≤1 (i∈V),x(S∖Γ(S))−x(Γ(S)∖S)≤0(S⊆V).0 \le x_i \le 1\ (i \in V), \qquad x(S \setminus \Gamma(S)) - x(\Gamma(S) \setminus S) \le 0 \quad (S \subseteq V).0≤xi​≤1 (i∈V),x(S∖Γ(S))−x(Γ(S)∖S)≤0(S⊆V).

Theorem 5.3 — the sss-ttt Path Decomposable Subgraph Polytope

0≤xi≤1 (i∈V),x(S∖Γ∗(S))−x(Γ∗(S)∖S)≤0(S⊆V∖{s,t}).0 \le x_i \le 1\ (i \in V), \qquad x(S \setminus \Gamma^*(S)) - x(\Gamma^*(S) \setminus S) \le 0 \quad (S \subseteq V \setminus \{s,t\}).0≤xi​≤1 (i∈V),x(S∖Γ∗(S))−x(Γ∗(S)∖S)≤0(S⊆V∖{s,t}).

Theorem 5.4 — the PMS polytope of an arbitrary graph

0≤xi≤1 (i∈V),x(S)−x(N(S))≤∣S∣−c(S)0 \le x_i \le 1\ (i \in V), \qquad x(S) - x(N(S)) \le |S| - c(S)0≤xi​≤1 (i∈V),x(S)−x(N(S))≤∣S∣−c(S)

for every SSS all of whose components are single nodes or nonbipartite with odd order — the weakest faithful statement, since dropping the side condition would assert the inequality for subsets it does not hold for.

Significance

The results themselves. Each theorem gives an explicit, checkable linear system defining a polytope that arises naturally from a combinatorial covering/decomposition property, turning "does G(W)G(W)G(W) have property XXX" into a linear-programming feasibility question. Theorem 5.1 is the one the book proves in full and the template for the other three: bipartite matching, digraph assignment, and acyclic-digraph path decomposition are structurally parallel problems (all reduce to checking a König–Hall-type combinatorial condition), and the same lift-and-project technique handles all three uniformly. Theorem 5.4 extends the idea to arbitrary (non-bipartite) graphs at the cost of a sharper right-hand side and a component-based side condition, connecting to Edmonds' classical matching-polytope theory while remaining a genuinely different object (a polytope of coverable vertex sets, not of matchings themselves).

Formalizing it. No object in this mission — the PMS, Assignable, or Path Decomposable Subgraph polytopes, or their defining neighbor operators — exists on the platform prior to this mission. The closest platform result, MetricTSP.pm_polytope_decomposition (Edmonds' perfect matching polytope theorem, in edge-variable space over a fixed vertex set requiring every vertex matched), is a genuinely different object from Theorem 5.4's PMS polytope (vertex-variable space, vertices may be left unmatched by design) and is not reused as a kind: reference item; it is noted here as related, not equivalent.

Difficulty

The natural first attempt tries to verify each polytope's integrality directly, by checking a known sufficient condition (total unimodularity, balancedness) on the displayed vertex-space system itself. This fails: the book states explicitly that (5.5)'s coefficient matrix is not totally unimodular, which is exactly why the lift-to-edge-variables step is necessary at all. The real content of each theorem is the two-part argument: (1) the lifted system in edge/arc variables is totally unimodular (checkable directly), so its polyhedron is integral; and (2) the vertex- space system is exactly the projection of the lifted one — a nontrivial fact requiring Chapter 2's projection machinery, not merely an unfolding of definitions. Theorem 5.4's extra difficulty, flagged explicitly in the text, is that its projection cone is not pointed, so the proof must work with a finite generating set rather than extreme rays, and it suffices to find a subset of generators producing every facet rather than a complete generating set — a genuinely harder argument the book itself outsources to a citation.

Formalization scope

Undirected graphs use Mathlib's SimpleGraph; digraphs use a bare relation A : V → V → Prop (not required symmetric or irreflexive, matching the book's unrestricted notion). Bipartition is recorded via part : V → Bool (decidable by construction) rather than two Set V halves, keeping the sums x(V_1), x(V_2) computable over Finsets throughout. IsAssignable uses Equiv.Perm on the vertex-set subtype, since a cycle decomposition is exactly a permutation. IsComponentOf and IsBipartiteOn (Theorem 5.4) are built directly from reachability and 2-colorability rather than Mathlib's induced-subgraph/ConnectedComponent API, matching the "maximal connected subset" reading of "component" the book's own prose intends.

IsPathDecomposable (Theorem 5.3) encodes "admits an sss-ttt path decomposition" via a degree-constrained arc set (every interior node has exactly one incoming and one outgoing chosen arc, none entering sss or leaving ttt, at least one leaving sss) rather than an explicit list of vertex-disjoint paths — provably equivalent by the standard fact that an acyclic arc set with this degree pattern always decomposes into such a path family, and considerably lighter to state and reason about than constructing Path objects directly.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out explicitly: every theorem keeps the fractional box constraint 0≤xi≤10 \le x_i \le 10≤xi​≤1 rather than the integral xi∈{0,1}x_i \in \{0,1\}xi​∈{0,1} (per BRIEF.md's own warning, dropping the relaxation collapses the claim to a restatement of the combinatorial definition), and Theorem 5.1 is stated only for bipartite graphs — never generalized to subsume Theorem 5.4's genuinely different inequality system and side condition.

Selected references

  • E. Balas, Disjunctive Programming, Springer, 2018. DOI: 10.1007/978-3-030-00148-3, Chapter 5, §5.2.
  • M. O. Ball, U. Derigs, An analysis of alternate strategies for implementing matching algorithms, Networks 13 (1983) (cited in the text as [13], the origin of Theorems 5.2 and 5.3).
  • W. R. Pulleyblank, J. Edmonds, Facets of 1-matching polyhedra, in Hypergraph Seminar, Springer Lecture Notes in Mathematics 411 (1974) — the origin of the perfectly matchable subgraph polytope literature (cited in the text as [34], the origin of Theorem 5.1).
  • L. Lovász, M. D. Plummer, Matching Theory, Elsevier, 1986 (cited in the text as [35], the origin of Theorem 5.4).
6 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Disjunctive Programming II: The Convex Hull of a Disjunctive Set via Lifting and ProjectionTextbook

Motivation

Convexity is what makes optimization tractable: a linear program's feasible region is convex, and this single fact underwrites the simplex method, LP duality, and everything built on top of them. Integer and disjunctive programs have no such luck — their feasible regions are unions of polyhedra, and a union of convex sets is generally not convex. If the convex hull of such a union could always be described compactly, integer programming would reduce to linear programming: optimize the same linear objective over the hull instead of the union, and any optimal vertex of the hull is automatically integral. The obstacle has always been that the convex hull of a union of polyhedra in Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, described directly by its facets in Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, typically needs exponentially many inequalities.

Balas's Theorem 2.1, proved in the 1970s and presented here as Chapter 2 of Disjunctive Programming (Balas, Springer 2018), breaks this exponential barrier by changing where the description lives. Rather than writing down the hull's facets in Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, Theorem 2.1 lifts the problem to a higher-dimensional space — one auxiliary copy of Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn per polyhedron in the union — where the hull becomes the projection of a single, explicitly given polyhedron whose size grows only linearly with the number of polyhedra. This "extended formulation" technique, born here, became one of the central tools of modern integer programming and combinatorial optimization: representing a hard polytope as the projection of an easy one in higher dimension underlies, for instance, the polynomial-size extended formulations known for many combinatorial polytopes.

Setting

Fix a finite index set QQQ. For h∈Qh \in Qh∈Q, let AhA_hAh​ be a real matrix and bhb_hbh​ a vector of matching row dimension, and set Ph:={x∈Rn:Ahx≥bh}P_h := \{x \in \mathbb{R}^n : A_h x \ge b_h\}Ph​:={x∈Rn:Ah​x≥bh​}. The union F:=⋃h∈QPhF := \bigcup_{h \in Q} P_hF:=⋃h∈Q​Ph​ is the disjunctive set. Write Q∗:={h∈Q:Ph≠∅}Q^* := \{h \in Q : P_h \ne \emptyset\}Q∗:={h∈Q:Ph​=∅} for the feasible disjuncts.

The recession cone of a nonempty polyhedron PhP_hPh​ is Ch:={y:Ahy≥0}C_h := \{y : A_h y \ge 0\}Ch​:={y:Ah​y≥0}: the set of directions along which one can travel indefinitely from any point of PhP_hPh​ while remaining in PhP_hPh​. For a subset M⊆QM \subseteq QM⊆Q and sets ShS_hSh​ (h∈Mh \in Mh∈M), the (finite) Minkowski sum ∑h∈MSh\sum_{h \in M} S_h∑h∈M​Sh​ is {x:x=∑h∈Myh for some yh∈Sh}\{x : x = \sum_{h \in M} y^h \text{ for some } y^h \in S_h\}{x:x=∑h∈M​yh for some yh∈Sh​}. The maximal indices Q∗∗⊆Q∗Q^{**} \subseteq Q^*Q∗∗⊆Q∗ are the feasible disjuncts whose polyhedron is not contained in any other feasible disjunct's polyhedron.

Given a set S⊆Rn×βS \subseteq \mathbb{R}^n \times \betaS⊆Rn×β, its projection onto xxx is Projx(S):={x:∃ y∈β, (x,y)∈S}\mathrm{Proj}_x(S) := \{x : \exists\, y \in \beta,\ (x,y) \in S\}Projx​(S):={x:∃y∈β, (x,y)∈S}.

Formalization targets

Theorem 2.1 (goal) — the convex hull of a disjunctive set

cl conv(F)=Projx(P),P:={(x,{yh}h∈Q∗,{y0h}h∈Q∗):x= ⁣ ⁣∑h∈Q∗ ⁣ ⁣yh, Ahyh−bhy0h≥0, y0h≥0,  ⁣ ⁣∑h∈Q∗ ⁣ ⁣y0h=1}.\mathrm{cl}\,\mathrm{conv}(F) = \mathrm{Proj}_x(P), \qquad P := \Big\{(x, \{y^h\}_{h \in Q^*}, \{y^h_0\}_{h \in Q^*}) : x = \!\!\sum_{h \in Q^*}\!\! y^h,\ A_h y^h - b_h y^h_0 \ge 0,\ y^h_0 \ge 0,\ \!\!\sum_{h \in Q^*}\!\! y^h_0 = 1 \Big\}.clconv(F)=Projx​(P),P:={(x,{yh}h∈Q∗​,{y0h​}h∈Q∗​):x=h∈Q∗∑​yh, Ah​yh−bh​y0h​≥0, y0h​≥0, h∈Q∗∑​y0h​=1}.

This is the weakest correct statement: it claims only that the closed convex hull equals the projection of this specific lifted polyhedron PPP, not any stronger uniqueness or minimality claim about lifted representations in general (that refinement is Theorem 2.1's own follow-up discussion, not part of the theorem itself).

Corollary 2.2 — the extreme-point correspondence

Extreme points of cl conv(F)\mathrm{cl}\,\mathrm{conv}(F)clconv(F) correspond bijectively to the extreme points of PPP that place all of their mass on a single disjunct's coordinates.

Theorem 2.3 — tightness of the lifted representation

PQ=P  ⟺  Ck⊆∑h∈Q∗Ch∀ k∈Q∖Q∗,P_Q = P \iff C_k \subseteq \sum_{h \in Q^*} C_h \quad \forall\, k \in Q \setminus Q^*,PQ​=P⟺Ck​⊆h∈Q∗∑​Ch​∀k∈Q∖Q∗,

where PQP_QPQ​ is the variant of PPP indexed by all of QQQ rather than only Q∗Q^*Q∗.

Theorem 2.4 — from the convex hull to the union itself

Under two recession-cone conditions on Q∗∗Q^{**}Q∗∗, restricting PQP_QPQ​'s y0hy^h_0y0h​ variables to {0,1}\{0,1\}{0,1} makes its xxx-projection recover FFF itself, not merely cl conv(F)\mathrm{cl}\,\mathrm{conv}(F)clconv(F).

Significance

The result itself. Theorem 2.1 is the founding extended-formulation result of integer programming: it shows that every union of finitely many polyhedra — hence every mixed-integer program's feasible region, once expressed in disjunctive normal form — has a lifted description of size linear in the number of disjuncts, in stark contrast to the union's own facet description, which is generally exponential. Corollary 2.2 shows this lifting is not merely an upper bound with extraneous points: its extreme points correspond exactly, one-to-one, with the extreme points of the object it represents. Theorems 2.3 and 2.4 sharpen the picture: 2.3 tells you exactly when you can avoid knowing in advance which disjuncts are nonempty, and 2.4 tells you exactly when the same family of lifted systems, restricted to integral y0hy^h_0y0h​, describes the union FFF exactly rather than only its convex hull — this is Jeroslow and Lowe's characterization of when a disjunctive set is representable as the feasible region of an integer program at all.

Formalizing it. No object in this mission — the disjunctive set FFF, its lifted polyhedron PPP, recession cones of a union's components, or the extreme-point correspondence between a polytope and its lift — exists on the platform prior to this mission or anywhere in Mathlib (substrate.md records zero LP/polyhedron modules in Mathlib as of this writing). This mission is a from-scratch formalization of the book's central construction, restating (rather than importing) the disjunctive-set vocabulary introduced by the companion IntroDuality mission, per the series' convention that a draft mission cannot import another draft mission's definitions.

Difficulty

The natural first attempt at Theorem 2.1 tries to prove the two inclusions cl conv(F)⊆Projx(P)\mathrm{cl}\,\mathrm{conv}(F) \subseteq \mathrm{Proj}_x(P)clconv(F)⊆Projx​(P) and Projx(P)⊆cl conv(F)\mathrm{Proj}_x(P) \subseteq \mathrm{cl}\,\mathrm{conv}(F)Projx​(P)⊆clconv(F) by a direct facet-by-facet or vertex-by-vertex argument in Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn — exactly the exponential-size approach the theorem exists to avoid. The book's own first proof instead works entirely with convex combinations: an arbitrary point of cl conv(F)\mathrm{cl}\,\mathrm{conv}(F)clconv(F) is a combination of at most ∣Q∗∣|Q^*|∣Q∗∣ points, one from each polyhedron in the union (Carathéodory-style), which converts directly into a point of PPP by splitting the combination's weight across the lifted coordinates — and conversely, a point of PPP decomposes, disjunct by disjunct, into a convex combination of that disjunct's own vertices and extreme rays. Neither direction ever needs to enumerate facets of cl conv(F)\mathrm{cl}\,\mathrm{conv}(F)clconv(F) in Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn. The second proof (via projection and the polar cone WWW of the lifted system) shows the projected inequalities coincide with exactly the valid-inequality characterization of Theorem 1.2 (disjunctive Farkas), which is a different, complementary way of seeing why no facet of cl conv(F)\mathrm{cl}\,\mathrm{conv}(F)clconv(F) is missed.

Formalization scope

All theorems are stated over a finite index set Q : Type* with [Fintype Q], matrices Matrix (Fin (m h)) (Fin n) ℝ with m : Q → ℕ allowed to depend on h, and vectors in Fin n → ℝ. DisjunctiveSet, FeasibleIndices, MaximalIndices, RecessionCone, and MinkowskiSumOver fix the chapter's vocabulary; ProjX, LiftedPolyhedron, and IntegerRestricted fix the lifted system and its variants. cl conv F is Mathlib's closure (convexHull ℝ ·); extreme points use Mathlib's Set.extremePoints.

LiftedPolyhedron ranges its auxiliary vectors {yh}\{y^h\}{yh}, {y0h}\{y^h_0\}{y0h​} over all of QQQ rather than only the index subset Qidx the book restricts to, forcing the components outside Qidx to zero. This is an equivalent, Finset/decidability-free encoding — appending zero terms changes neither the defining sums nor the constraints — documented as a convention, not a weakening, in MODERATION_NOTES.md; the same definition instantiates both the (2.1)(2.1)(2.1) system (Qidx = Q^*) and the (2.1)Q(2.1)_Q(2.1)Q​ variant (Qidx = Q) that Theorem 2.3 compares.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out explicitly: taking ∣Q∗∣=1|Q^*| = 1∣Q∗∣=1 collapses the lifted system to x=y1x = y^1x=y1, y01=1y^1_0 = 1y01​=1, a vacuous restatement of x∈P1x \in P_1x∈P1​ that proves nothing about unions. Every theorem here is stated for a generic finite Q, never specialized to a fixed small size. Contributions beyond this mission's statements would need genuine polyhedral machinery (vertex/extreme-ray decomposition of a polyhedron, Carathéodory's theorem for cones) that is itself absent from Mathlib and would be welcome as a separate, reusable definitions layer.

Selected references

  • E. Balas, Disjunctive Programming, Springer, 2018. DOI: 10.1007/978-3-030-00148-3, Chapter 2, §2.1.
  • E. Balas, Disjunctive programming: Properties of the convex hull of feasible points, Discrete Applied Mathematics 89 (1998), 3–44 (reprint of a 1974 MSRR, cited in the text as [6], the origin of Theorem 2.1).
  • M. Conforti, M. Di Summa, Y. Faenza, On the size of extended formulations for polytopes associated with unions of polyhedra, SIAM Journal on Discrete Mathematics, cited in the text as [59] — establishes the tightness (minimum additional-variable count) of Theorem 2.1's lifted representation.
  • R. G. Jeroslow, J. K. Lowe, Modelling with integer variables, Mathematical Programming Study 22 (1984), 167–184 (cited in the text as [86]; the characterization behind Theorem 2.4's significance).
6 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Disjunctive Programming I: Intersection Cuts and Duality for Disjunctive ProgramsTextbook

Motivation

Linear programming duality is one of the load-bearing facts of optimization: every feasible linear program has a dual whose value matches the primal's, and this correspondence drives the simplex method's stopping criterion, sensitivity analysis, and most complexity results for polyhedral problems. Integer and mixed-integer programs have no such duality theorem in general — the feasible region of a mixed-integer program is not convex, and the entire apparatus of linear programming duality is built on convexity.

Disjunctive programming, introduced by Egon Balas in the early 1970s, closes part of this gap. A disjunctive set is a union of finitely many polyhedra rather than a single polyhedron — the natural convex-analytic shadow of the "either/or" logical structure that integer variables encode (an integer variable's feasible region is a finite union of half-open pieces, hence a disjunction of the linear constraints that pin it to each value). Balas's insight was that disjunctive programs — linear programs whose feasible region is such a union — admit a strong duality theorem of their own, generalizing the linear-programming case rather than replacing it. This mission formalizes that theorem (Theorem 1.5 of Balas, Disjunctive Programming, Springer 2018) together with the two results the same chapter builds around it: the founding construction of the field, the intersection cut (Theorem 1.1, circa 1970), and the disjunctive generalization of Farkas' Lemma (Theorem 1.2), which characterizes every valid inequality — hence every cutting plane — for a disjunctive set.

Setting

Fix a finite index set QQQ. For each h∈Qh \in Qh∈Q, let AhA_hAh​ be a real mh×nm_h \times nmh​×n matrix and bh∈Rmhb_h \in \mathbb{R}^{m_h}bh​∈Rmh​, and set Ph:={x∈Rn:Ahx≥bh}P_h := \{x \in \mathbb{R}^n : A_h x \ge b_h\}Ph​:={x∈Rn:Ah​x≥bh​}. The union F:=⋃h∈QPhF := \bigcup_{h \in Q} P_hF:=⋃h∈Q​Ph​ is a disjunctive set: any (linear) system of inequalities combined with the logical connectives "and", "or", "not" reduces, via its disjunctive normal form, to a set of exactly this shape. Because a union of convex sets need not be convex, FFF is generally nonconvex even though each PhP_hPh​ is a polyhedron.

A disjunctive program minimizes a linear objective over such a union:

(DP)z0=min⁡{cx:x∈⋃h∈QXh},Xh:={x:Ahx≥bh, x≥0}.(DP)\qquad z_0 = \min\Big\{ c x : x \in \textstyle\bigcup_{h \in Q} X_h \Big\}, \qquad X_h := \{x : A_h x \ge b_h,\ x \ge 0\}.(DP)z0​=min{cx:x∈⋃h∈Q​Xh​},Xh​:={x:Ah​x≥bh​, x≥0}.

Its dual (DD)(DD)(DD) pairs a scalar www with one dual multiplier vector uhu_huh​ per disjunct, requiring w≤uhbhw \le u_h b_hw≤uh​bh​ and uhAh≤cu_h A_h \le cuh​Ah​≤c, uh≥0u_h \ge 0uh​≥0, simultaneously for every h∈Qh \in Qh∈Q, and maximizes www. Write Q∗:={h∈Q:Xh≠∅}Q^* := \{h \in Q : X_h \ne \emptyset\}Q∗:={h∈Q:Xh​=∅} for the disjuncts whose primal system is feasible, and Q∗∗:={h∈Q:Uh≠∅}Q^{**} := \{h \in Q : U_h \ne \emptyset\}Q∗∗:={h∈Q:Uh​=∅} (with Uh:={uh≥0:uhAh≤c}U_h := \{u_h \ge 0 : u_h A_h \le c\}Uh​:={uh​≥0:uh​Ah​≤c}) for those whose dual system is feasible.

The theorems below also use two objects from the origin of the subject (§1.2): given a basic solution xˉ\bar xxˉ of a linear program's optimal simplex tableau, with basic index set III and nonbasic index set JJJ, the tableau's coefficients aˉij\bar a_{ij}aˉij​ (i∈Ii \in Ii∈I, j∈Jj \in Jj∈J) determine, for each nonbasic jjj, an extreme ray direction rjr^jrj of the associated LP cone. A convex set SSS is PIP_IPI​-free at xˉ\bar xxˉ if xˉ\bar xxˉ lies in the interior of SSS and that interior contains no point of the mixed-integer feasible set PIP_IPI​.

Formalization targets

Theorem 1.1 — the intersection cut

λj∗:=max⁡{λj≥0:xˉ+λjrj∈S},∑j∈J1λj∗ xj≥1.\lambda^*_j := \max\{\lambda_j \ge 0 : \bar x + \lambda_j r^j \in S\}, \qquad \sum_{j \in J} \frac{1}{\lambda^*_j}\, x_j \ge 1.λj∗​:=max{λj​≥0:xˉ+λj​rj∈S},j∈J∑​λj∗​1​xj​≥1.

The displayed inequality cuts off xˉ\bar xxˉ but excludes no point of PIP_IPI​, for any PIP_IPI​-free convex set SSS containing xˉ\bar xxˉ in its interior.

Theorem 1.2 — Farkas' Lemma for Disjunctive Sets

(∀x∈F, αx≥α0)  ⟺  (∀h∈Q∗, ∃ uh≥0, uhAh=α, α0≤uhbh).\big(\forall x \in F,\ \alpha x \ge \alpha_0\big) \iff \big(\forall h \in Q^*,\ \exists\, u_h \ge 0,\ u_h A_h = \alpha,\ \alpha_0 \le u_h b_h\big).(∀x∈F, αx≥α0​)⟺(∀h∈Q∗, ∃uh​≥0, uh​Ah​=α, α0​≤uh​bh​).

Theorem 1.5 (goal) — duality for disjunctive programs

Under the Regularity Condition — (Q∗≠∅(Q^* \ne \emptyset(Q∗=∅ and Q∖Q∗∗≠∅)⇒Q∗∖Q∗∗≠∅Q \setminus Q^{**} \ne \emptyset) \Rightarrow Q^* \setminus Q^{**} \ne \emptysetQ∖Q∗∗=∅)⇒Q∗∖Q∗∗=∅ — exactly one of:

  1. both (DP)(DP)(DP) and (DD)(DD)(DD) are feasible, each attains an optimum, and z0=w0z_0 = w_0z0​=w0​; or
  2. one of the two is infeasible, and the other is infeasible or has no finite optimum.

This is the weakest faithful statement of the theorem: it asserts only the shape of the dichotomy established by Balas, not any strengthened or specialized form of it.

Corollary 1.6 — necessity of the Regularity Condition

If the Regularity Condition fails, (DP)(DP)(DP) is feasible, and (DD)(DD)(DD) is infeasible, then (DP)(DP)(DP) still has a finite minimum — exhibiting the duality gap that opens up once the condition is dropped.

Significance

The results themselves. Theorem 1.5 is the mission-critical fact that makes disjunctive programming a genuine extension of linear programming rather than an unrelated combinatorial device: every LP-duality-based algorithmic tool (bounding, sensitivity, complementary-slackness optimality certificates) has a disjunctive-programming counterpart because of this theorem. Theorem 1.1's intersection cut is the historical seed of an entire branch of integer-programming algorithms — lift-and-project cuts, mixed-integer Gomory cuts, and the split closure (later missions of this series) all specialize or generalize it. Theorem 1.2 is the structural fact that makes cutting-plane generation for disjunctive sets tractable at all: every valid inequality decomposes into per-disjunct Farkas certificates.

Formalizing it. None of these results, nor the union-of-polyhedra machinery they are stated over, exist on the platform prior to this mission: the platform's existing Farkas' Lemma and linear-programming strong duality theorems (SmaleNinth.farkas_lemma, SmaleNinth.lp_strong_duality) are the ordinary single-polyhedron statements, which is exactly the special case ∣Q∣=1|Q|=1∣Q∣=1 of the theorems formalized here — genuinely different statements, not restatements. This mission is a from-scratch formalization of the disjunctive generalization, including the vocabulary (disjunctive sets, the paired primal/dual index sets Q∗,Q∗∗Q^*, Q^{**}Q∗,Q∗∗, the Regularity Condition) that the rest of the fifteen-mission Balas series builds on.

Difficulty

The obvious first attempt collapses the disjunctive dual (DD)(DD)(DD) to ∣Q∣|Q|∣Q∣ separate ordinary LP duals, one per disjunct, and tries to combine their individual strong-duality statements. This fails: (DD)(DD)(DD) couples all disjuncts through the single shared scalar www, which must simultaneously satisfy w≤uhbhw \le u_h b_hw≤uh​bh​ for every h∈Qh \in Qh∈Q at once, not disjunct-by-disjunct. The Regularity Condition exists precisely because this coupling can break down — Balas's own example (a two-term disjunctive program with an infeasible dual but a feasible, bounded primal) shows that without the condition, situation (2) of the dichotomy can fail: the primal can have a finite optimum with no matching dual optimum. Any formalization that omits the Regularity Condition, or weakens it to an informal restriction like "nondegenerate", either proves a false statement or proves nothing (a vacuous hypothesis), which Corollary 1.6 exists specifically to rule out.

Formalization scope

All three theorems are stated over a finite index set Q : Type* with [Fintype Q], real matrices Matrix (Fin (m h)) (Fin n) ℝ with row-dimension m : Q → ℕ allowed to depend on h (the book never assumes a common row count across disjuncts), and vectors in Fin n → ℝ. Poly, PolyNonneg, and DualPoly are the plain, nonnegative-orthant, and dual polyhedral systems respectively; FeasibleIndices and RegularityCondition pin Q∗Q^*Q∗/Q∗∗Q^{**}Q∗∗ and the Regularity Condition exactly as stated on p. 13. "No finite optimum" is formalized via UnboundedBelowOn / UnboundedAboveOn: nonempty (feasible) together with no finite bound on the objective, matching Balas's case (2), which explicitly distinguishes infeasibility from unboundedness.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out explicitly: fixing ∣Q∣=1|Q| = 1∣Q∣=1 collapses Theorem 1.5 to ordinary LP duality (already on the platform) and Theorem 1.2 to ordinary Farkas' Lemma, so both theorems are stated for a generic finite Q, never specialized. Theorem 1.5's "exactly one of" dichotomy is formalized as a logical Xor of the two situations, not a weaker Or, since the book asserts mutual exclusivity, not merely that one holds.

The intersection-cut theorem (1.1) is formalized over a generic finite index type ι standing for the full set of structural and surplus variables, with I J : Finset ι the basic/nonbasic partition; a complete development would additionally need the simplex-tableau apparatus connecting ι, I, J, and abar to an actual linear program, which lies outside this mission and belongs instead to the tableau-focused later missions of the series (SimplexTableau, RayCGLP). The extremeRay and PIFree definitions introduced here are local to this mission and are restated, not imported, by later missions that need related vocabulary — per the series' convention that a draft mission cannot import another draft mission's definitions.

Selected references

  • E. Balas, Disjunctive Programming, Springer, 2018. DOI: 10.1007/978-3-030-00148-3, Chapter 1.
  • E. Balas, Intersection cuts — a new type of cutting planes for integer programming, Operations Research 19 (1971), 19–39. (Theorem 1.1's origin, cited in the text as [4].)
  • E. Balas, Disjunctive programming, Annals of Discrete Mathematics 5 (1979), 3–51. (Cited in the text as [9], the origin of Theorem 1.5.)
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsConvex OptimizationGraph Theory·Captain: mikedeng1

Cones of Matrices and Set-Functions and 0–1 Optimization IV: Clique, Odd Hole, Odd Wheel and Odd Antihole Constraints Hold after One Round of N₊Research Paper

Motivation

The stable set problem (find a largest, or maximum-weight, set of pairwise non-adjacent nodes in a graph) is NP-hard, and its linear programming relaxations have been studied since the 1970s as a test bed for polyhedral combinatorics. Lovász and Schrijver (SIAM J. Optim. 1991) introduced a general lift-and-project procedure for 0–1 programs: lift a relaxation to a cone of (n+1)×(n+1)(n+1)\times(n+1)(n+1)×(n+1) matrices, impose conditions every 0–1 solution satisfies, and project back. Its semidefinite version, the operator N+N_+N+​, is one of the first systematic uses of positive semidefinite constraints in combinatorial optimization, and it is the ancestor of the Sherali–Adams, Lasserre and sum-of-squares hierarchies used today in approximation algorithms and proof complexity.

For the stable set problem the paper measures the strength of the operators by an index: how many rounds are needed before a given valid inequality is implied. This mission formalizes the paper's result that one round of N+N_+N+​ already implies four of the classical families of facets of the stable set polytope.

Timeline:

  • 1975: Chvátal shows that the rank constraint of a connected α-critical graph defines a facet of its stable set polytope (Chvátal 1975); clique, odd hole and odd antihole constraints are special rank constraints.
  • 1981–88: Grötschel, Lovász and Schrijver show that the weighted stable set problem is solvable in polynomial time for perfect and hhh-perfect graphs, through the theta body TH(G)\mathrm{TH}(G)TH(G) (Grötschel, Lovász, Schrijver 1988).
  • 1991: Lovász and Schrijver define the operators NNN and N+N_+N+​ and prove Corollary 2.15: clique, odd hole, odd wheel and odd antihole constraints have N+N_+N+​-index 1.

Setting

Vectors live in Rn+1\mathbb R^{n+1}Rn+1 with coordinates x0,x1,…,xnx_0, x_1, \dots, x_nx0​,x1​,…,xn​. The polar cone of KKK is K∗={u:uTx≥0 ∀x∈K}K^* = \{u : u^{\mathsf T}x \ge 0 \ \forall x \in K\}K∗={u:uTx≥0 ∀x∈K}. Let QQQ be the cone spanned by the 0–1 vectors with x0=1x_0 = 1x0​=1. For a convex cone K⊆QK \subseteq QK⊆Q, the matrix cone M+(K)M_+(K)M+​(K) consists of the symmetric positive semidefinite matrices Y=(yij)Y = (y_{ij})Y=(yij​) with yii=y0iy_{ii} = y_{0i}yii​=y0i​ for 1≤i≤n1 \le i \le n1≤i≤n and uTYv≥0u^{\mathsf T}Yv \ge 0uTYv≥0 for all u∈K∗u \in K^*u∈K∗, v∈Q∗v \in Q^*v∈Q∗. The operator is

N+(K)={Ye0:Y∈M+(K)},N_+(K) = \{Ye_0 : Y \in M_+(K)\},N+​(K)={Ye0​:Y∈M+​(K)},

and N+0(K)=KN_+^0(K) = KN+0​(K)=K, N+t(K)=N+(N+t−1(K))N_+^t(K) = N_+(N_+^{t-1}(K))N+t​(K)=N+​(N+t−1​(K)).

Let G=(V,E)G = (V, E)G=(V,E) be a finite graph with no isolated nodes (the paper's standing assumption for Section 2). STAB(G)\mathrm{STAB}(G)STAB(G) is the convex hull of incidence vectors χA\chi^AχA of stable sets AAA. FRAC(G)\mathrm{FRAC}(G)FRAC(G) is the polytope given by xi≥0x_i \ge 0xi​≥0 and xi+xj≤1x_i + x_j \le 1xi​+xj​≤1 for ij∈Eij \in Eij∈E. FR(G)⊆RV∪{0}\mathrm{FR}(G) \subseteq \mathbb R^{V\cup\{0\}}FR(G)⊆RV∪{0} is the cone xi≥0x_i \ge 0xi​≥0, xi+xj≤x0x_i + x_j \le x_0xi​+xj​≤x0​. The relaxations are

N+r(G)={x∈RV:(1,x)∈N+r(FR(G))},N_+^r(G) = \{x \in \mathbb R^V : (1, x) \in N_+^r(\mathrm{FR}(G))\},N+r​(G)={x∈RV:(1,x)∈N+r​(FR(G))},

so N+0(G)=FRAC(G)⊇N+1(G)⊇⋯⊇STAB(G)N_+^0(G) = \mathrm{FRAC}(G) \supseteq N_+^1(G) \supseteq \dots \supseteq \mathrm{STAB}(G)N+0​(G)=FRAC(G)⊇N+1​(G)⊇⋯⊇STAB(G). The N+N_+N+​-index of an inequality aTx≤ba^{\mathsf T}x \le baTx≤b valid for STAB(G)\mathrm{STAB}(G)STAB(G) is the least rrr with aTx≤ba^{\mathsf T}x \le baTx≤b valid for N+r(G)N_+^r(G)N+r​(G).

The four constraint families are:

  • clique: ∑i∈Bxi≤1\sum_{i\in B} x_i \le 1∑i∈B​xi​≤1 for a clique BBB;
  • odd hole: ∑i∈Cxi≤12(∣C∣−1)\sum_{i\in C} x_i \le \frac12(|C|-1)∑i∈C​xi​≤21​(∣C∣−1) for CCC inducing a chordless odd cycle;
  • odd wheel: ∑i∈U∖{u0}xi+∣U∣−22xu0≤∣U∣−22\sum_{i\in U\setminus\{u_0\}} x_i + \frac{|U|-2}{2}x_{u_0} \le \frac{|U|-2}{2}∑i∈U∖{u0​}​xi​+2∣U∣−2​xu0​​≤2∣U∣−2​ for UUU inducing an odd wheel with center u0u_0u0​ (an odd hole plus a node adjacent to all of it);
  • odd antihole: ∑i∈Dxi≤2\sum_{i\in D} x_i \le 2∑i∈D​xi​≤2 for DDD inducing a chordless odd cycle in the complement of GGG.

The contraction of a node vvv turns aTx≤ba^{\mathsf T}x \le baTx≤b into the inequality with the coefficients of vvv and its neighbours removed and right-hand side b−avb - a_vb−av​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 2.15

For every graph GGG without isolated nodes, each clique constraint (clique of size at least 3), odd hole constraint, odd wheel constraint and odd antihole constraint has N+N_+N+​-index exactly 1:

aTx≤b holds on N+1(G)and fails somewhere on FRAC(G).a^{\mathsf T}x \le b \text{ holds on } N_+^1(G) \quad\text{and fails somewhere on } \mathrm{FRAC}(G).aTx≤b holds on N+1​(G)and fails somewhere on FRAC(G).

Milestones

  1. Lemma 1.5: for a closed convex cone K⊆QK \subseteq QK⊆Q and aaa with ai≤0a_i \le 0ai​≤0 (i≥1i \ge 1i≥1), a0≥0a_0 \ge 0a0​≥0, if aTx≥0a^{\mathsf T}x \ge 0aTx≥0 holds on K∩GiK \cap G_iK∩Gi​ (where Gi={xi=x0}G_i = \{x_i = x_0\}Gi​={xi​=x0​}) for every iii with ai<0a_i < 0ai​<0, then it holds on N+(K)N_+(K)N+​(K).
  2. Lemma 2.14: if aTx≤ba^{\mathsf T}x \le baTx≤b is valid for STAB(G)\mathrm{STAB}(G)STAB(G), and the contraction of every node with positive coefficient is valid for N+r(G)N_+^r(G)N+r​(G), then aTx≤ba^{\mathsf T}x \le baTx≤b is valid for N+r+1(G)N_+^{r+1}(G)N+r+1​(G).
  3. Bipartite support (Section 2.c): an inequality valid for STAB(G)\mathrm{STAB}(G)STAB(G) whose nonzero-coefficient nodes induce a bipartite graph is valid for FRAC(G)\mathrm{FRAC}(G)FRAC(G).
  4. Contraction property (Section 2.d): contracting a node with positive coefficient in any of the four constraints leaves positive-coefficient nodes that induce a bipartite subgraph.

Further result

Corollary 2.19 (first sentence): the N+N_+N+​-index of a STAB(G)\mathrm{STAB}(G)STAB(G)-valid inequality aTx≤ba^{\mathsf T}x \le baTx≤b is at most the independence number of the subgraph induced by the nodes with positive coefficient.

Significance

Corollary 2.15 shows that a single round of N+N_+N+​, a relaxation over which one can optimize in polynomial time for each fixed number of rounds (the paper's Theorem 2.1), captures all clique, odd hole, odd wheel and odd antihole inequalities at once. Consequently N+(G)=STAB(G)N_+(G) = \mathrm{STAB}(G)N+​(G)=STAB(G) for every hhh-perfect graph, in particular for perfect and ttt-perfect graphs. The result is a standard reference point when comparing lift-and-project hierarchies, and the lemmas behind it (Lemma 1.5 and Lemma 2.14) are the paper's general tools for bounding N+N_+N+​-ranks.

The theorem was proved in 1991. To our knowledge it has not been machine-checked: this mission would produce the first formal development of the Lovász–Schrijver N+N_+N+​ operator, its iterates, and the stable set relaxations STAB\mathrm{STAB}STAB, FRAC\mathrm{FRAC}FRAC, FR\mathrm{FR}FR in Lean.

Difficulty

The lower bound (each constraint fails on FRAC(G)\mathrm{FRAC}(G)FRAC(G)) is a direct computation; the upper bound is where the work lies. The obvious approach, deriving each constraint from the linear conditions on the lifted matrix YYY alone, cannot succeed: those conditions define the linear operator NNN, and the goal is specifically about what positive semidefiniteness adds. The general lemmas are stated for arbitrary cones and require a working theory of polar cones and closedness in Rn+1\mathbb R^{n+1}Rn+1, including closedness of the iterates N+r(FR(G))N_+^r(\mathrm{FR}(G))N+r​(FR(G)), which the paper uses without comment. The graph-theoretic steps require facts about the stable set and fractional stable set polytopes of bipartite graphs and a careful case analysis of chordless odd cycles in a graph and in its complement, none of which is in Mathlib.

Formalization scope

  • Coordinates of Rn+1\mathbb R^{n+1}Rn+1 are indexed by Option ι, with none the special coordinate x0x_0x0​. For graphs, ι := V.
  • MMM is defined by condition (iii) with polar cones, not by its reformulations. Only M+M_+M+​, N+N_+N+​ and their iterates are defined; the linear operator NNN is not used.
  • Lemma 1.5 carries the hypothesis that KKK is closed. The paper takes it tacitly (all its cones are polyhedral); without it the lemma fails, since N+(K)N_+(K)N+​(K) depends only on the closure of KKK.
  • FR(G)\mathrm{FR}(G)FR(G) is defined by its constraints, which agree with the paper's "cone spanned by the vectors (1,x)(1,x)(1,x), x∈FRAC(G)x \in \mathrm{FRAC}(G)x∈FRAC(G)" because GGG has no isolated nodes. Every graph statement carries the no-isolated-nodes hypothesis.
  • Contraction is written on the same graph GGG as a zeroed coefficient vector, rather than on the subgraph G−Γ(v)−vG - \Gamma(v) - vG−Γ(v)−v.
  • Odd holes include triangles; odd antiholes have at least 5 nodes (a 3-node "antihole" is a stable set, for which the constraint is false); odd wheels are an odd hole plus a center adjacent to all its nodes.
  • Clique constraints in the goal are restricted to cliques with at least 3 nodes: cliques of size 1 or 2 give inequalities already valid on FRAC(G)\mathrm{FRAC}(G)FRAC(G), of index 0.
  • "N+N_+N+​-index at most rrr" is stated as validity on N+r(G)N_+^r(G)N+r​(G); the index itself is stated with IsLeast, never with an infimum that would default to 0 on an empty set.

A formalization asserting only validity on N+1(G)N_+^1(G)N+1​(G), or only for one fixed graph, would be weaker than the paper's statement and is ruled out: the goal states the exact index for all graphs without isolated nodes and all four families.

Not formalized: the linear operator NNN and its results, the polynomial-time separation results (Theorem 2.1, Corollaries 2.20–2.21), the theta-body results (Lemma 2.17, Corollary 2.18), graph indices (Corollary 2.16), and the second sentence of Corollary 2.19.

Reusable infrastructure includes the polar cone, the matrix cone M+M_+M+​ and the N+N_+N+​ operator (usable for any 0–1 program), the polytopes STAB\mathrm{STAB}STAB and FRAC\mathrm{FRAC}FRAC, and odd holes, antiholes and wheels as finite-set predicates. Contributions proving closedness of the iterates, the integrality of FRAC\mathrm{FRAC}FRAC for bipartite graphs, or the MMM-cone reformulations (iii′)–(iii″) are welcome.

Selected references

  • L. Lovász and A. Schrijver, Cones of matrices and set-functions and 0–1 optimization, SIAM Journal on Optimization 1(2), 1991, 166–190. https://doi.org/10.1137/0801013
  • M. Grötschel, L. Lovász and A. Schrijver, Geometric Algorithms and Combinatorial Optimization, Springer, 1988 (2nd ed. 1993). https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-78240-4
  • V. Chvátal, On certain polytopes associated with graphs, Journal of Combinatorial Theory B 18, 1975, 138–154. https://doi.org/10.1016/0095-8956(75)90041-6
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsOptimizationTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

Approximation Algorithms for Combinatorial Problems IV: Greedy Set Cover C1 Has Worst-Case Ratio H(k) on SC(k)Research Paper

Motivation

Set covering asks for the fewest members of a family of sets whose union is everything the family covers. It models crew scheduling, facility siting, test-suite reduction, logic minimization and fault testing; Johnson names the last two as its practical applications. Karp showed in 1972 that the decision version is NP-complete (Karp 1972), so in practice one runs a heuristic and asks how far from optimal it can be.

David S. Johnson's 1974 paper Approximation Algorithms for Combinatorial Problems (JCSS 9, 256–278) is one of the founding papers of the worst-case analysis of approximation algorithms. For set covering it analyses the obvious greedy rule, repeatedly take a set that covers the most still-uncovered points, and proves that on families whose sets have at most kkk elements its output is never more than the harmonic number H(k)=∑j=1k1/jH(k) = \sum_{j=1}^k 1/jH(k)=∑j=1k​1/j times the optimum, and that this factor is attained.

Timeline.

  • 1974: Johnson proves the H(k)H(k)H(k) bound for unweighted set cover with sets of size at most kkk, together with a matching family of examples (this mission).
  • 1975: Lovász proves the same bound for the fractional relaxation, giving an integrality-gap statement (Lovász 1975).
  • 1979: Chvátal extends the bound to weighted set cover, with the greedy rule choosing the set of least cost per newly covered point (Chvátal 1979).
  • 1998: Feige shows that no polynomial-time algorithm achieves (1−ε)ln⁡n(1-\varepsilon)\ln n(1−ε)lnn unless NP has slightly superpolynomial deterministic algorithms (Feige 1998), so the greedy guarantee is essentially the best possible.

Setting

An input FFF of SET COVERING I is a finite family {S1,…,Sp}\{S_1, \dots, S_p\}{S1​,…,Sp​} of finite sets. The set to be covered is T=⋃S∈FST = \bigcup_{S \in F} ST=⋃S∈F​S. A subcover is a subfamily F′⊆FF' \subseteq FF′⊆F with ⋃S∈F′S=T\bigcup_{S \in F'} S = T⋃S∈F′​S=T, and its measure is ∣F′∣|F'|∣F′∣. The optimum F∗F^*F∗ is the minimum measure of a subcover; FFF itself is a subcover, so the minimum exists. The subproblem SC(k) restricts the inputs to families no set of which has more than kkk elements.

Algorithm C1 keeps a family SUB of chosen sets, the set UNCOV of uncovered points, and an array SET[i][i][i] holding the still-uncovered part of SiS_iSi​. It starts with SUB =∅= \emptyset=∅, UNCOV =T= T=T, SET[i]=Si[i] = S_i[i]=Si​. While UNCOV is nonempty it chooses an index jjj with ∣SET[j]∣|\mathrm{SET}[j]|∣SET[j]∣ maximal, adds SjS_jSj​ to SUB, and removes SET[j][j][j] from UNCOV and from every SET[i][i][i]. When UNCOV is empty it returns SUB. When several indices tie at Step 3 any of them may be chosen, so one input can have several choosable outputs. Following Section 2 of the paper, the algorithm's value C1(F)C1(F)C1(F) is the worst choosable output, here the largest, and the ratio is r(C1,F)=C1(F)/F∗r(C1, F) = C1(F)/F^*r(C1,F)=C1(F)/F∗.

For the proof the paper introduces configurations K=⟨NK,UNCOVK,⟨SETK[1],…,SETK[NK]⟩⟩K = \langle N_K, \mathrm{UNCOV}_K, \langle \mathrm{SET}_K[1], \dots, \mathrm{SET}_K[N_K]\rangle\rangleK=⟨NK​,UNCOVK​,⟨SETK​[1],…,SETK​[NK​]⟩⟩ with ⋃iSETK[i]=UNCOVK\bigcup_i \mathrm{SET}_K[i] = \mathrm{UNCOV}_K⋃i​SETK​[i]=UNCOVK​, runs from a configuration (sequences of admissible choices ending when UNCOV is empty), Numbers(R)\mathrm{Numbers}(R)Numbers(R), the set of indices chosen in a run RRR, and calls a set MMM selectable from KKK if M=Numbers(R)M = \mathrm{Numbers}(R)M=Numbers(R) for some run RRR from KKK. Write n(K,i)=∣SETK[i]∣n(K, i) = |\mathrm{SET}_K[i]|n(K,i)=∣SETK​[i]∣.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4

For every k≥1k \ge 1k≥1:

for every input F∈SC(k) and every choosable F1:∣F1∣≤H(k)⋅F∗,\text{for every input } F \in SC(k) \text{ and every choosable } F_1:\quad |F_1| \le H(k)\cdot F^*,for every input F∈SC(k) and every choosable F1​:∣F1​∣≤H(k)⋅F∗, and some F∈SC(k) with F∗>0 has a choosable F1 with ∣F1∣=H(k)⋅F∗.\text{and some } F \in SC(k) \text{ with } F^* > 0 \text{ has a choosable } F_1 \text{ with } |F_1| = H(k)\cdot F^*.and some F∈SC(k) with F∗>0 has a choosable F1​ with ∣F1​∣=H(k)⋅F∗.

The paper states this as R[C1,SC(k)](n)≤∑j=1k(1/j)R[C1, SC(k)](n) \le \sum_{j=1}^k (1/j)R[C1,SC(k)](n)≤∑j=1k​(1/j) for all n>0n > 0n>0, with equality for all sufficiently large nnn. The two-part form above is the size-free equivalent.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 1. For a subcover F1F_1F1​ with index set M1={i:Si∈F1}M1 = \{i : S_i \in F_1\}M1={i:Si​∈F1​} and KKK the configuration after Step 1: F1F_1F1​ is choosable by C1 if and only if M1M1M1 is selectable from KKK.
  2. Lemma 2. For any configuration KKK, any M1M1M1 selectable from KKK and any M0M0M0 with ⋃i∈M0SETK[i]=UNCOVK\bigcup_{i \in M0} \mathrm{SET}_K[i] = \mathrm{UNCOV}_K⋃i∈M0​SETK​[i]=UNCOVK​:
∣M1∣≤∑i∈M0∑j=1n(K,i)1j.|M1| \le \sum_{i \in M0} \sum_{j=1}^{n(K,i)} \frac{1}{j}.∣M1∣≤i∈M0∑​j=1∑n(K,i)​j1​.
  1. Fig. 1. For every k≥1k \ge 1k≥1 there is an explicit input of SC(k)SC(k)SC(k) on k⋅k!k \cdot k!k⋅k! points with F∗=k!F^* = k!F∗=k! and a choosable output of k! H(k)k!\,H(k)k!H(k) sets.

Significance

The result. Theorem 4 is the first proof that greedy set cover has a worst-case guarantee depending only on the largest set size, and it pins the guarantee down exactly: the constant H(k)H(k)H(k) cannot be lowered for any kkk. Since H(k)≤1+ln⁡kH(k) \le 1 + \ln kH(k)≤1+lnk, it also gives the well-known 1+ln⁡n1 + \ln n1+lnn bound for general inputs. The H(k)H(k)H(k) bound and its later refinements are the standard reference point for analyses of greedy covering, dual fitting and submodular covering.

Formalizing it. The theorem has been proved since 1974. As far as a search of the platform shows, no machine-checked proof of it exists: the platform holds a Kearns–Vazirani-style statement ComputationalLearning.greedy_set_cover (the opt⋅ln⁡∣U∣\mathrm{opt}\cdot\ln|U|opt⋅ln∣U∣ form for a greedy sequence, still open) and a dual-fitting certificate lemma for weighted set cover, neither of which covers the SC(k)SC(k)SC(k) bound, the tie-breaking semantics or the tightness construction. A complete development provides both halves of Theorem 4, the configuration and run machinery of Lemmas 1–2, and the explicit Fig. 1 family.

Difficulty

The obvious argument charges each chosen set to the points it newly covers and compares the charges with an optimal cover. A statement about the initial input alone, with the original sizes of the optimal sets, does not survive a single greedy step: after a step the optimal sets are only partly uncovered and the remaining run faces a different instance. This is why Lemma 2 is stated for an arbitrary configuration, in terms of the current sizes n(K,i)n(K, i)n(K,i), and for an arbitrary covering subfamily M0M0M0. Because Step 3 breaks ties arbitrarily, the statement must hold for every admissible run, and a formalization that fixes one tie-breaking rule proves a weaker upper bound and cannot express the tightness example, which relies on adversarial ties at every stage.

For the tightness half, the difficulty is bookkeeping: showing that the k!/jk!/jk!/j blocks of each segment are admissible choices at each stage and that no cover uses fewer than k!k!k! sets.

Formalization scope

  • An input is an indexed family S : ι → Finset α over a finite index type ι and a ground type with decidable equality. The indices play the role of 1,…,N1, \dots, N1,…,N; two indices may carry the same set, which only widens the input class. The family, subcovers and F∗F^*F∗ are taken over the set of sets family S, as on the page. F∗F^*F∗ is a Finset.inf' over the nonempty finite set of subcovers; if T=∅T = \emptysetT=∅ then F∗=0F^* = 0F∗=0.
  • C1 is a nondeterministic step relation: a step is allowed for every index maximizing ∣SET[j]∣|\mathrm{SET}[j]|∣SET[j]∣. An output is choosable if a finite chain of steps from the initial state reaches a halting state with that SUB. No tie-breaking rule is fixed.
  • The paper's R[A,P](n)R[A, P](n)R[A,P](n) is a maximum over inputs of size at most nnn in an unspecified notation; it is replaced by the size-free two-part statement above, which is equivalent because RRR is a maximum over finitely many inputs and nondecreasing in nnn.
  • Ratios are stated multiplicatively in Q\mathbb{Q}Q (∣F1∣≤H(k)⋅F∗|F_1| \le H(k)\cdot F^*∣F1​∣≤H(k)⋅F∗), never as a quotient, so an input with F∗=0F^* = 0F∗=0 does not make the bound vacuous, and the attainment part requires F∗>0F^* > 0F∗>0. H(k)H(k)H(k) is Mathlib's harmonic k.
  • Configurations carry the covering condition as a field; runs are an inductive predicate on the list of chosen indices; Selectable K M means MMM is the set of indices of some run.
  • Lemma 1 assumes the family's sets are pairwise distinct (the paper's family is a set of sets); without that the index set {i:Si∈F1}\{i : S_i \in F_1\}{i:Si​∈F1​} may contain a duplicate index C1 never chose.
  • Trivializing formalizations are ruled out: a deterministic tie-break, a ratio written as a division, the original set sizes in place of n(K,i)n(K, i)n(K,i) in Lemma 2, or an attaining input with F∗=0F^* = 0F∗=0 would each change the theorem.

Contributions welcome: proofs of Lemma 2 (the core induction), of Lemma 1, of the Fig. 1 run, and of Theorem 4 from these; the configuration/run layer and the Fig. 1 family are reusable for other greedy covering analyses.

Selected references

  • David S. Johnson, Approximation algorithms for combinatorial problems, Journal of Computer and System Sciences 9 (1974), 256–278. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0022-0000(74)80044-9
  • Richard M. Karp, Reducibility among combinatorial problems, in Complexity of Computer Computations, Plenum, 1972, 85–103. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4684-2001-2_9
  • László Lovász, On the ratio of optimal integral and fractional covers, Discrete Mathematics 13 (1975), 383–390. https://doi.org/10.1016/0012-365X(75)90058-8
  • Vašek Chvátal, A greedy heuristic for the set-covering problem, Mathematics of Operations Research 4 (1979), 233–235. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.4.3.233
  • Uriel Feige, A threshold of ln n for approximating set cover, Journal of the ACM 45 (1998), 634–652. https://doi.org/10.1145/285055.285059
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsOptimizationTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

Approximation Algorithms for Combinatorial Problems II: The Greedy Literal Algorithm B1 Has Worst-Case Ratio (k+1)/k on MS(k)Research Paper

Motivation

Maximum satisfiability asks for a truth assignment satisfying as many clauses of a propositional formula as possible. The paper notes that the restriction MS(k)MS(k)MS(k), in which every clause has at least kkk literals, is polynomial complete for every k≥1k \ge 1k≥1, so exact optimization is out of reach in general and one asks instead how close a fast algorithm is guaranteed to come. David S. Johnson's 1974 paper Approximation Algorithms for Combinatorial Problems (J. Comput. System Sci. 9, 256–278) set up a framework for exactly this question — optimization problems, nondeterministic approximation algorithms, and the worst-case ratio between the optimum and the algorithm's output — and applied it to subset-sum, maximum satisfiability, set covering, graph coloring and maximum clique. It is one of the founding papers of the theory of approximation algorithms.

Section 4 of the paper treats maximum satisfiability with two algorithms. This mission covers the first, a greedy literal-selection rule called B1, and its exact worst-case ratio (Theorem 2). A companion mission covers the weighted algorithm B2 (Theorem 3).

Timeline, for orientation:

  • 1971–1972: Cook and Karp establish NP-completeness of satisfiability and of many combinatorial problems.
  • 1974: Johnson proves that B1 has worst-case ratio exactly (k+1)/k(k+1)/k(k+1)/k on MS(k)MS(k)MS(k) and that the weighted algorithm B2 achieves 2k/(2k−1)2^k/(2^k-1)2k/(2k−1) (Theorems 2 and 3).
  • 1990s: semidefinite and LP-based algorithms (Goemans–Williamson, SIAM J. Discrete Math. 1994) improve the constants for general MAX-SAT.

Setting

Let L=⋃i>0{xi,xˉi}L = \bigcup_{i>0}\{x_i, \bar x_i\}L=⋃i>0​{xi​,xˉi​} be the set of literals; the complement of xix_ixi​ is xˉi\bar x_ixˉi​ and conversely. A clause is a finite set C⊆LC \subseteq LC⊆L. A truth assignment is a set T⊆LT \subseteq LT⊆L containing no complementary pair {xi,xˉi}\{x_i, \bar x_i\}{xi​,xˉi​}; it may leave variables unassigned. TTT satisfies CCC if C∩T≠∅C \cap T \ne \emptysetC∩T=∅.

An input is a finite set SSS of clauses. Its feasible solutions are the subsets S′⊆SS' \subseteq SS′⊆S satisfied by a single truth assignment, measured by ∣S′∣|S'|∣S′∣, and the optimum is

S∗=max⁡{∣S′∣:S′⊆S, some truth assignment satisfies every C∈S′}.S^* = \max\{|S'| : S' \subseteq S,\ \text{some truth assignment satisfies every } C \in S'\}.S∗=max{∣S′∣:S′⊆S, some truth assignment satisfies every C∈S′}.

The subproblem MS(k)MS(k)MS(k) admits only inputs whose clauses each contain at least kkk distinct literals.

Algorithm B1 keeps four variables: SUB (clauses already satisfied), LEFT (clauses not yet satisfied), TRUE (literals made true) and LIT (literals still available). It starts with SUB === TRUE =∅= \emptyset=∅, LEFT =S= S=S, LIT =L= L=L. While some literal of LIT occurs in a clause of LEFT, it picks a literal y∈y \iny∈ LIT contained in the most clauses of LEFT, moves those clauses YTYTYT from LEFT to SUB, adds yyy to TRUE, and removes yyy and yˉ\bar yyˉ​ from LIT. When no literal of LIT occurs in LEFT it returns SUB.

The choice of yyy is not determined when several literals tie. Following the paper's framework, every output reachable by some sequence of admissible choices is choosable, and the performance of B1 on SSS is the smallest ∣X∣|X|∣X∣ over choosable outputs XXX. The worst-case ratio on inputs of size at most nnn is

R[B1,MS(k)](n)=max⁡{S∗/B1(S):S∈MS(k), ∣S∣≤n}.R[B1, MS(k)](n) = \max\{S^*/B1(S) : S \in MS(k),\ |S| \le n\}.R[B1,MS(k)](n)=max{S∗/B1(S):S∈MS(k), ∣S∣≤n}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 262)

For all k≥1k \ge 1k≥1,

R[B1,MS(k)](n)≤k+1kfor all n>0,R[B1, MS(k)](n) \le \frac{k+1}{k}\quad\text{for all } n > 0,R[B1,MS(k)](n)≤kk+1​for all n>0,

with equality for all sufficiently large nnn. In the size-free form used here: every choosable output XXX on every S∈MS(k)S \in MS(k)S∈MS(k) satisfies k S∗≤(k+1) ∣X∣k\,S^* \le (k+1)\,|X|kS∗≤(k+1)∣X∣, and for every k≥1k \ge 1k≥1 some S∈MS(k)S \in MS(k)S∈MS(k) has a choosable XXX with ∣X∣>0|X| > 0∣X∣>0 and k S∗=(k+1) ∣X∣k\,S^* = (k+1)\,|X|kS∗=(k+1)∣X∣.

Milestones (from the proof of Theorem 2, pp. 262–263)

  1. In each iteration, the number of clauses saved (added to SUB) is at least the number of clauses remaining in LEFT that are wounded (lose a literal from LIT without being satisfied).
  2. When B1 halts, every clause left in LEFT is dead: each of its literals has had its complement made true.
  3. When B1 halts on an input of MS(k)MS(k)MS(k), ∣SUB∣≥k ∣LEFT∣|\mathrm{SUB}| \ge k\,|\mathrm{LEFT}|∣SUB∣≥k∣LEFT∣, and SUB and LEFT partition SSS.
  4. On the four-clause input {{x1,x2,x3},{xˉ1,x4,x5},{xˉ2,x6,x7},{xˉ3,x8,x9}}\{\{x_1,x_2,x_3\},\{\bar x_1,x_4,x_5\},\{\bar x_2,x_6,x_7\},\{\bar x_3,x_8,x_9\}\}{{x1​,x2​,x3​},{xˉ1​,x4​,x5​},{xˉ2​,x6​,x7​},{xˉ3​,x8​,x9​}} of MS(3)MS(3)MS(3), S∗=4S^* = 4S∗=4 while B1 may return three clauses.

Significance

The bound is stronger than a ratio: milestone 3 shows that B1 always satisfies at least kk+1∣S∣\tfrac{k}{k+1}|S|k+1k​∣S∣ clauses, whatever the optimum. The tightness half shows that this simple greedy rule cannot be analysed any better, which is what motivated the weighted algorithm B2 of the same section, with ratio 2k/(2k−1)2^k/(2^k-1)2k/(2k−1). The pair of theorems is an early instance of a now standard pattern: a potential-style counting argument for an upper bound, and an adversarial tie-breaking instance for the matching lower bound.

The result is proved in the paper; it has not, to our knowledge, been machine-checked. This mission produces a formal model of Johnson's framework for a maximization problem with a nondeterministic algorithm, a formal proof of the upper bound through the "saved versus wounded" accounting, and explicit tightness instances for every k≥1k \ge 1k≥1. The paper spells out only k=3k = 3k=3 and states that "similar examples can be constructed for any other k>0k > 0k>0"; the formal goal requires them for all kkk.

Difficulty

The upper bound needs an invariant over entire runs, not over a single step: a clause wounded in one iteration may be saved in a later one, so wounds and saves must be tallied globally, and the count of wounds received by a clause that ends in LEFT must be matched with its number of literals. That matching relies on the facts that B1 never makes both a literal and its complement true and that a clause containing a true literal has already left LEFT. Clauses containing both xix_ixi​ and xˉi\bar x_ixˉi​ are allowed and have to be handled.

The lower bound cannot be obtained from a fixed tie-breaking rule: the attaining run chooses negative literals whose count merely ties the maximum. For general kkk the instance has to be built so that every literal occurs in few enough clauses that the adversarial choice is admissible at every step; at k=1k = 1k=1 the paper's pattern degenerates and needs adjusting.

Formalization scope

  • A literal is a pair (variable index in N\mathbb NN, sign); a clause is a Finset of literals; an input is a Finset of clauses, so duplicate clauses are not allowed, as on the page. Tautological clauses are allowed.
  • A truth assignment is a Set of literals without a complementary pair (partial, as in the paper). S∗S^*S∗ is the maximum of ∣S′∣|S'|∣S′∣ over the finite nonempty family of satisfiable subsets, taken with Finset.sup'.
  • B1 is a nondeterministic run relation: a state holds SUB, LEFT, TRUE and the set of decided variables (LIT is its complement, since LLL is infinite); one step chooses any literal of LIT, of either sign, with maximum count; "choosable" is reachability of a halting state with the given SUB. No tie-break is fixed. A formalization that picks a variable and then its better sign, or that resolves ties deterministically, is a different algorithm and would make the tightness half false.
  • The ratio R[B1,MS(k)](n)R[B1, MS(k)](n)R[B1,MS(k)](n), whose problem size is left unspecified in the paper, is replaced by its size-free equivalent, and ratios are written multiplicatively in N\mathbb NN: k S∗≤(k+1)∣X∣k\,S^* \le (k+1)|X|kS∗≤(k+1)∣X∣. The tightness half requires ∣X∣>0|X| > 0∣X∣>0, so the empty input cannot witness it.
  • The running time O(nlog⁡n)O(n \log n)O(nlogn) is not stated.

Welcome contributions: proofs of the milestones, the invariants of reachable B1 states (SUB and LEFT partition SSS; TRUE is consistent and exactly covers the decided variables; no clause of LEFT meets TRUE), and the family of tightness instances for general kkk. The run-relation encoding of choosable outputs is reusable for the other algorithms of the paper.

Selected references

  • D. S. Johnson, Approximation algorithms for combinatorial problems, Journal of Computer and System Sciences 9 (1974), 256–278. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0022-0000(74)80044-9
  • R. M. Karp, Reducibility among combinatorial problems, in Complexity of Computer Computations, Plenum, 1972, 85–103. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4684-2001-2_9
  • M. X. Goemans and D. P. Williamson, New 3/4-approximation algorithms for the maximum satisfiability problem, SIAM Journal on Discrete Mathematics 7 (1994), 656–666. https://doi.org/10.1137/S0895480192243516
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsOptimizationTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

Approximation Algorithms for Combinatorial Problems I: The Subset-Sum Algorithms A_k Have Worst-Case Ratio (k+1)/kResearch Paper

Motivation

David S. Johnson's 1974 paper Approximation Algorithms for Combinatorial Problems (J. Comput. System Sci. 9 (1974) 256–278) is one of the founding papers of the theory of approximation algorithms. It asks, for optimization problems whose decision versions Karp had just shown to be polynomial complete, how close a fast heuristic can be guaranteed to come to the optimum in the worst case, and it measures this with a worst-case performance ratio that is still the standard yardstick.

Its first example is SUBSET-SUM, the simplest form of the knapsack problem: pack items of given sizes into a knapsack of capacity bbb so as to fill it as much as possible. For this problem the paper gives a family of algorithms AkA_kAk​, one for each k≥1k \ge 1k≥1, whose guaranteed ratio (k+1)/k(k+1)/k(k+1)/k tends to 111. It is one of the first examples of what is now called a polynomial-time approximation scheme: for every ϵ>0\epsilon > 0ϵ>0 there is a polynomial-time algorithm within a factor 1+ϵ1 + \epsilon1+ϵ of optimal. Sahni (1975) extended the idea to the knapsack problem with utilities, and Ibarra and Kim (1975) later obtained fully polynomial schemes for knapsack and subset-sum.

This mission formalizes Theorem 1 of the paper, the performance guarantee of AkA_kAk​ together with its tightness.

Setting

An input ⟨T,s,b⟩\langle T, s, b\rangle⟨T,s,b⟩ of SUBSET-SUM is a finite set TTT, a positive rational size s(x)s(x)s(x) for every x∈Tx \in Tx∈T, and a positive rational bound bbb. An approximate solution is a subset T′⊆TT' \subseteq TT′⊆T with m(T′)≤bm(T') \le bm(T′)≤b, where the measure is m(T′)=∑x∈T′s(x)m(T') = \sum_{x \in T'} s(x)m(T′)=∑x∈T′​s(x). The problem is a maximization problem with optimal measure

⟨T,s,b⟩∗=max⁡{ m(T′):T′⊆T, m(T′)≤b }.\langle T, s, b\rangle^* = \max\{\, m(T') : T' \subseteq T,\ m(T') \le b \,\}.⟨T,s,b⟩∗=max{m(T′):T′⊆T, m(T′)≤b}.

Fix k≥1k \ge 1k≥1 and call xxx big if s(x)>b/(k+1)s(x) > b/(k+1)s(x)>b/(k+1) and small otherwise. Algorithm AkA_kAk​ keeps a set SUB\mathrm{SUB}SUB, its measure SUM\mathrm{SUM}SUM, and the remaining elements LEFT\mathrm{LEFT}LEFT:

  1. SUB\mathrm{SUB}SUB is a subset of the big elements whose measure is as large as possible without exceeding bbb; SUM=m(SUB)\mathrm{SUM} = m(\mathrm{SUB})SUM=m(SUB) and LEFT=T∖SUB\mathrm{LEFT} = T \setminus \mathrm{SUB}LEFT=T∖SUB.
  2. If s(x)+SUM>bs(x) + \mathrm{SUM} > bs(x)+SUM>b for every x∈LEFTx \in \mathrm{LEFT}x∈LEFT, return SUB\mathrm{SUB}SUB.
  3. Otherwise pick y∈LEFTy \in \mathrm{LEFT}y∈LEFT with s(y)+SUMs(y) + \mathrm{SUM}s(y)+SUM as large as possible without exceeding bbb, move it from LEFT\mathrm{LEFT}LEFT to SUB\mathrm{SUB}SUB, add s(y)s(y)s(y) to SUM\mathrm{SUM}SUM, and return to step 2.

Steps 1 and 3 may have ties. Following the paper, a set T1T_1T1​ is choosable by AkA_kAk​ if some resolution of all ties produces it, and the performance Ak(u)A_k(u)Ak​(u) on input uuu is the smallest measure of a choosable output. The ratio is r(Ak,u)=u∗/Ak(u)≥1r(A_k, u) = u^*/A_k(u) \ge 1r(Ak​,u)=u∗/Ak​(u)≥1, and R[Ak](n)R[A_k](n)R[Ak​](n) is its maximum over inputs of size at most nnn.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 260)

For k≥1k \ge 1k≥1 and n>0n > 0n>0,

R[Ak](n)≤k+1k,lim⁡n→∞R[Ak](n)=k+1k.R[A_k](n) \le \frac{k+1}{k}, \qquad \lim_{n \to \infty} R[A_k](n) = \frac{k+1}{k}.R[Ak​](n)≤kk+1​,n→∞lim​R[Ak​](n)=kk+1​.

Formally, for every k≥1k \ge 1k≥1: every choosable output T1T_1T1​ of every input satisfies k ⟨T,s,b⟩∗≤(k+1) m(T1)k\,\langle T,s,b\rangle^* \le (k+1)\,m(T_1)k⟨T,s,b⟩∗≤(k+1)m(T1​); and for every δ>0\delta > 0δ>0 some input has a choosable output T1T_1T1​ with m(T1)>0m(T_1) > 0m(T1​)>0 and ⟨T,s,b⟩∗>(k+1k−δ) m(T1)\langle T,s,b\rangle^* > \big(\tfrac{k+1}{k} - \delta\big)\,m(T_1)⟨T,s,b⟩∗>(kk+1​−δ)m(T1​).

Milestones

  1. For T1T_1T1​ choosable and T0T_0T0​ any approximate solution, m(T1BIG)≥m(T0BIG)m(T_1^{\mathrm{BIG}}) \ge m(T_0^{\mathrm{BIG}})m(T1BIG​)≥m(T0BIG​) (p. 260).
  2. If a small x∈Tx \in Tx∈T is not in a choosable T1T_1T1​, then s(x)+m(T1)>bs(x) + m(T_1) > bs(x)+m(T1​)>b, hence m(T1)>kb/(k+1)≥kk+1⟨T,s,b⟩∗m(T_1) > kb/(k+1) \ge \tfrac{k}{k+1}\langle T,s,b\rangle^*m(T1​)>kb/(k+1)≥k+1k​⟨T,s,b⟩∗ (p. 261).
  3. The stronger dichotomy: m(T1)=⟨T,s,b⟩∗m(T_1) = \langle T,s,b\rangle^*m(T1​)=⟨T,s,b⟩∗ or m(T1)≥kk+1 bm(T_1) \ge \tfrac{k}{k+1}\,bm(T1​)≥k+1k​b (p. 260).
  4. The lower-bound input T={a1,…,ak+2}T = \{a_1,\dots,a_{k+2}\}T={a1​,…,ak+2​}, s(a1)=1+εs(a_1) = 1+\varepsilons(a1​)=1+ε, s(ai)=1s(a_i) = 1s(ai​)=1 otherwise, b=k+1b = k+1b=k+1: its optimum is k+1k+1k+1, some output is choosable, and every choosable output has measure k+εk + \varepsilonk+ε (p. 261).

Significance

Theorem 1 shows that SUBSET-SUM admits polynomial-time algorithms with any worst-case ratio above 111, in contrast with the other problems of the paper (set covering, graph colouring, maximum clique), whose best known ratios grow with the input. The algorithms AkA_kAk​ are an early instance of the partial-enumeration schemes later used for knapsack-type problems. The tightness half shows that the analysis of AkA_kAk​ itself cannot be sharpened.

The theorem has a short published proof, but no machine-checked version is known; there is no subset-sum or knapsack approximation result on the platform. The mission produces a reusable model of SUBSET-SUM, a model of nondeterministic algorithms through a run relation that captures every tie-break, and a checked proof that the worst case is exactly (k+1)/k(k+1)/k(k+1)/k. The same modelling pattern (choosable outputs, worst-case ratio taken over them) is used in the sibling missions of this series for MAX-SAT, set covering and exact covering.

Difficulty

The arithmetic of the upper bound is short; the difficulty is in reasoning about the algorithm as a nondeterministic process. The natural first attempt, implementing AkA_kAk​ as a function with a fixed tie-breaking rule, proves a weaker statement: the guarantee must hold for every output the algorithm may return, including adversarial ties in step 1 (several maximum-measure sets of big elements) and step 3. Facts that are obvious for a single run, such as SUM\mathrm{SUM}SUM always equalling m(SUB)m(\mathrm{SUB})m(SUB) or which elements can enter SUB\mathrm{SUB}SUB after step 1, have to be established for the run relation as a whole. The lower bound requires tracing the run on the explicit input for general kkk: exactly k−1k-1k−1 unit elements are added after a1a_1a1​, and this must be shown for every choosable run, not only for one.

Formalization scope

  • Numbers. Sizes and the bound are rationals (ℚ), as in the paper; sizes are required to be positive on TTT and b>0b > 0b>0. The index kkk is a natural number with 1≤k1 \le k1≤k as a hypothesis; b/(k+1)b/(k+1)b/(k+1) is rational division, and "big" is the strict inequality s(x)>b/(k+1)s(x) > b/(k+1)s(x)>b/(k+1).
  • Optimum. opt u is Finset.sup' of the measure over the finite set of approximate solutions, which always contains ∅\emptyset∅; it is 000 when no element fits.
  • Run relation. Choosable k u T₁ states that some admissible step 1 choice, followed by a finite chain of admissible iterations (Relation.ReflTransGen), reaches a halting state returning T1T_1T1​. Every "closest to, without exceeding" is an existential choice among all maximizers.
  • Size-free restatement. The paper's input size ∣u∣|u|∣u∣ ("in some standard notation") is never fixed, so the goal quantifies over all inputs instead of over sizes. The upper bound for all choosable outputs is equivalent to R[Ak](n)≤(k+1)/kR[A_k](n) \le (k+1)/kR[Ak​](n)≤(k+1)/k for all nnn; since R[Ak]R[A_k]R[Ak​] is nondecreasing, the limit claim is equivalent to the supremum of the ratio over all inputs being (k+1)/k(k+1)/k(k+1)/k, which is the second part.
  • Multiplicative ratios. No ratio is written as a division, so an output of measure 000 cannot satisfy a bound vacuously; the lower-bound part requires m(T1)>0m(T_1) > 0m(T1​)>0. The value (k+1)/k(k+1)/k(k+1)/k is not claimed to be attained: the paper's family has ratio (k+1)/(k+ε)(k+1)/(k+\varepsilon)(k+1)/(k+ε).
  • Lower-bound input. A def on Fin (k + 2) exactly as on the page, with 0<ε<10 < \varepsilon < 10<ε<1 (the page leaves the range implicit; ε<1\varepsilon < 1ε<1 keeps a1a_1a1​ the only big element that fits when k=1k = 1k=1).
  • Ruled out. A formalization with a deterministic tie-break, with a bound of the form opt/m≤c\mathrm{opt}/m \le copt/m≤c in a field where x/0=0x/0 = 0x/0=0, or with tightness for a single fixed kkk would be trivial or weaker; none of these is the target.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones and the goal, invariant lemmas for the run relation, and further sanity checks on small inputs. The running-time remark (O(nk)O(n^k)O(nk) for step 1) and Sahni's knapsack extension are not part of the mission.

Selected references

  • D. S. Johnson, Approximation algorithms for combinatorial problems, Journal of Computer and System Sciences 9 (1974) 256–278. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0022-0000(74)80044-9
  • S. Sahni, Approximate algorithms for the 0/1 knapsack problem, Journal of the ACM 22 (1975) 115–124. https://doi.org/10.1145/321864.321873
  • O. H. Ibarra, C. E. Kim, Fast approximation algorithms for the knapsack and sum of subset problems, Journal of the ACM 22 (1975) 463–468. https://doi.org/10.1145/321906.321909
  • R. M. Karp, Reducibility among combinatorial problems, in Complexity of Computer Computations, Plenum (1972) 85–103. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4684-2001-2_9
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
OptimizationTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

An n Job, One Machine Sequencing Algorithm for Minimizing the Number of Late Jobs I: Moore's Algorithm Yields a Schedule with the Minimum Number of Late JobsResearch Paper

Motivation

A single machine must process a set of jobs, each with a processing time and a due-date, and a job that finishes after its due-date is late. Counting late jobs is the natural objective when a late order is simply lost, whatever its lateness. In the three-field notation of scheduling theory this is the problem 1 ∥ ∑Uj1\,\|\,\sum U_j1∥∑Uj​, and it is one of the few single-machine problems with a due-date objective that a simple greedy rule solves exactly.

J. Michael Moore gave that rule in 1968 (Management Science 15(1):102–109). The only exact method previously available was the Held–Karp dynamic program, which is exponential in the number of jobs. Moore's algorithm is two sorts plus at most n(n+1)/2n(n+1)/2n(n+1)/2 additions and comparisons. The rule, and the variant from the paper's Author's Supplement (credited to T. J. Hodgson and today called the Moore–Hodgson algorithm), is in every scheduling textbook, for example Brucker, Scheduling Algorithms, Ch. 4, and is the base case of later work on weighted and release-date variants.

Timeline:

  • 1955: J. R. Jackson shows that a job set can be scheduled with no late job if and only if the earliest-due-date order has none (Management Science Research Project report 43, UCLA).
  • 1968: Moore publishes the algorithm and its proof of optimality, with Hodgson's variant stated without proof.
  • 1970s onward: the weighted version 1 ∥ ∑wjUj1\,\|\,\sum w_jU_j1∥∑wj​Uj​ is shown NP-hard (Karp 1972, via knapsack), and 1 ∣ rj ∣ ∑Uj1\,|\,r_j\,|\,\sum U_j1∣rj​∣∑Uj​ likewise (Lenstra, Rinnooy Kan and Brucker 1977), so Moore's greedy rule does not extend to them.

Setting

A finite set JJJ of jobs is given. Job jjj has a processing time tj≥0t_j \ge 0tj​≥0 and a due-date DjD_jDj​, and the paper assumes tj≤Djt_j \le D_jtj​≤Dj​ for every job (a job that cannot finish on time even if started at time 000 is removed beforehand). The machine starts at time 000 and processes the jobs one after another, without idle time or preemption.

A schedule SSS of JJJ is an ordering (Ji1,…,Jin)(J_{i_1},\dots,J_{i_n})(Ji1​​,…,Jin​​) of all jobs of JJJ. The job in position kkk completes at Cik=ti1+⋯+tikC_{i_k} = t_{i_1} + \dots + t_{i_k}Cik​​=ti1​​+⋯+tik​​. The late set is L={Ji:Ci>Di}L = \{J_i : C_i > D_i\}L={Ji​:Ci​>Di​} and the early set is E={Ji:Ci≤Di}E = \{J_i : C_i \le D_i\}E={Ji​:Ci​≤Di​}. A schedule is optimal if no schedule of JJJ has fewer late jobs. AAA and RRR denote the early and late jobs of SSS, each kept in their order in SSS.

Moore's algorithm works on a current sequence and a list of rejected jobs.

  • Step 1: order the jobs by non-decreasing processing time (the shortest processing time rule).
  • Step 2: find the first late job JiqJ_{i_q}Jiq​​ of the current sequence. If there is none, stop.
  • Step 3: re-order Ji1,…,JiqJ_{i_1},\dots,J_{i_q}Ji1​​,…,Jiq​​ by non-decreasing due-date. If all of them are then early, keep the re-ordered sequence. Otherwise reject JiqJ_{i_q}Jiq​​ and remove it. Return to Step 2.

The output is the final current sequence sorted by due-dates, followed by the rejected jobs in any order.

In Lean, a schedule is IsSchedule J l, the late set is lateSet t D l, optimality is IsOptimal t D J l, AAA and RRR are earlyPart/latePart, and one pass of Steps 2–3 is the relation MooreStep t D, all in the namespace MooreLateJobs.NumLate.

Formalization targets

Goal: Moore's algorithm is optimal (The Algorithm, Step 2, p. 103)

Let l0l_0l0​ be a shortest-processing-time schedule of JJJ, and let a run of MooreStep from (l0,[ ])(l_0,[\,])(l0​,[]) reach a state (cur,rej)(\mathrm{cur},\mathrm{rej})(cur,rej) in which cur\mathrm{cur}cur has no late job. Then for every due-date ordering ADA_DAD​ of cur\mathrm{cur}cur and every ordering PPP of rej\mathrm{rej}rej,

(AD, P) is an optimal schedule for J.(A_D,\,P)\ \text{is an optimal schedule for } J.(AD​,P) is an optimal schedule for J.

All tie-breaks in both sorts are covered.

Milestones

In attack order:

  1. Lemma 1 (p. 105): every optimal schedule has the same number of late jobs as (A,R)(A,R)(A,R) and as every (A,P)(A,P)(A,P).
  2. Jackson's lemma (p. 105).
  3. Lemma 2 (p. 105): re-ordering AAA by due-dates keeps an optimal (A,R)(A,R)(A,R) schedule optimal.
  4. Lemma 3 (p. 105): a job that is late in some optimal schedule can be removed and appended.
  5. The repeated-elimination claim (p. 106): after removing jobs late in successive optimal schedules until the rest is feasible, (AD,P)(A_D,P)(AD​,P) is optimal.
  6. Cases 2) and 3) of the Selection Algorithm (p. 107): in either case the job JqJ_qJq​ is late in some optimal schedule.
  7. Progress and termination of the algorithm (p. 108).

A companion item states the p. 104 remark that the final current sequence need not be re-sorted: (cur,P)(\mathrm{cur},P)(cur,P) is already optimal.

Significance

The theorem shows that the minimum number of late jobs on one machine can be found in O(nlog⁡n)O(n\log n)O(nlogn) time, by a rule that also produces an optimal schedule of a very particular shape: due-date ordered early jobs first, then the late jobs in any order. Lemma 3's decomposition, that jobs late in some optimal schedule may be discarded one at a time, is the template reused for many related greedy results in scheduling.

The result is classical and fully proved on paper. To our knowledge no machine-checked proof of Moore's algorithm, of the Moore–Hodgson variant, or of Jackson's rule exists in Mathlib. This mission produces a checked proof of the algorithm as stated in the paper, with every tie-break allowed, together with reusable single-machine objects (schedules as lists, completion times, late sets) and Jackson's earliest-due-date feasibility lemma.

Difficulty

Neither ordering rule works alone. Sorting by due-dates alone gives a schedule with no late job whenever one exists, but it can make many jobs late once any must be. Keeping the shortest jobs first does not respect the due-dates at all. The step that fails in a direct greedy argument is the claim that the specific job JiqJ_{i_q}Jiq​​, the one just found late, belongs to the late set of some optimal schedule. That job is not in general the longest job of the prefix, and the paper has to treat separately the two cases in which it is rejected. On top of this, the algorithm re-sorts prefixes on the fly, so the claim has to be tied to the invariants of the run: the prefix is early and due-date sorted, and the jobs after it are at least as long as JiqJ_{i_q}Jiq​​.

Formalization scope

  • Jobs and times. Jobs form a type ι with decidable equality; JJJ is a Finset ι; t,D:ι→Rt, D : ι \to \mathbb{R}t,D:ι→R.
  • Standing hypotheses. Every statement that involves schedules assumes tj≥0t_j \ge 0tj​≥0 and tj≤Djt_j \le D_jtj​≤Dj​ on JJJ. The first is added: processing times are durations, and Jackson's lemma fails for negative times. The second is the paper's assumption on p. 102.
  • Schedules and completion times. A schedule is a duplicate-free list with exactly the jobs of JJJ. Positions are 0-based, and the job in position kkk completes at the sum of the first k+1k+1k+1 processing times. Lateness is strict (Cj>DjC_j > D_jCj​>Dj​).
  • Optimality compares against every schedule of the same job set.
  • Ties. Orderings "by due-dates" and "by processing times" are List.Pairwise with ≤. Ties are arbitrary, and every statement quantifies over all such orderings.
  • The algorithm. Steps 2–3 are the relation MooreStep. The re-ordered prefix is any due-date sorted permutation of the first q+1q+1q+1 jobs, and case 2) rejects the first late job JiqJ_{i_q}Jiq​​ itself, not the longest job of the prefix (that is Hodgson's variant). A run is Relation.ReflTransGen.

The goal must concern runs of this step relation from a shortest-processing-time schedule of JJJ. Replacing the run by an arbitrary set of rejected jobs satisfying invariants would state a different theorem. The goal is not vacuous: the progress and termination milestones show that a terminal state is always reached.

Contributions are welcome at every level. Useful ones include general lemmas on completion times under permutation and filtering of lists, a proof of Jackson's lemma, proofs of the Selection Algorithm cases, and a proof of Hodgson's variant.

Selected references

  • J. M. Moore, An n Job, One Machine Sequencing Algorithm for Minimizing the Number of Late Jobs, Management Science 15(1):102–109, 1968. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.15.1.102
  • J. R. Jackson, Scheduling a Production Line to Minimize Maximum Tardiness, Research Report 43, Management Science Research Project, UCLA, 1955.
  • M. Held and R. M. Karp, A Dynamic Programming Approach to Sequencing Problems, J. SIAM 10(1):196–210, 1962. https://doi.org/10.1137/0110015
  • R. M. Karp, Reducibility among Combinatorial Problems, in Complexity of Computer Computations, 1972. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4684-2001-2_9
  • J. K. Lenstra, A. H. G. Rinnooy Kan and P. Brucker, Complexity of Machine Scheduling Problems, Annals of Discrete Mathematics 1:343–362, 1977. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0167-5060(08)70743-X
  • P. Brucker, Scheduling Algorithms, 5th ed., Springer, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-540-69516-5
15 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Scheduling with Deadlines and Loss Functions: On One Processor, Decreasing Penalty-to-Length Order Is Optimal When No Task Finishes Before Its DeadlineResearch Paper

Motivation

A processor, a machine shop or a single server must work through a set of jobs one at a time, and each job is costly when it is late. Deciding the order is the single-machine sequencing problem, the simplest and most studied model of scheduling theory. Robert McNaughton's 1959 article Scheduling with Deadlines and Loss Functions (Management Science 6(1):1–12) treats it for a computer that must run several tasks, each with a deadline and a loss that grows linearly with the lateness. Its §2 gives the first sufficient condition under which a simple ratio rule is optimal in the presence of deadlines, and shows that interrupting and resuming tasks ("splitting", now called preemption) never helps on one processor.

Timeline.

  • 1956: W. E. Smith, Various optimizers for single-stage production (Naval Research Logistics Quarterly 3), proves that sequencing jobs by non-increasing weight-to-processing-time ratio minimizes the total weighted completion time over non-preemptive sequences.
  • 1959: McNaughton, §2 of the present paper, proves independently that the same ratio order is optimal against all schedules, split or not and with idle time (Theorem 2.3), and extends it to deadlines when no task finishes early in that order (Theorem 2.4). §3 of the same paper gives the "wrap-around" rule for preemptive makespan on identical processors, and §4 the non-preemptive optimality for weighted completion time on several processors.
  • 1977: J. K. Lenstra, A. H. G. Rinnooy Kan and P. Brucker show that minimizing total weighted tardiness on one machine, the general problem of §2, is strongly NP-hard (Annals of Discrete Mathematics 1); this is why §2 gives a sufficient condition and not an algorithm.

Setting

There are mmm tasks (1),…,(m)(1),\dots,(m)(1),…,(m) for a single processor, and the present is time 000. Task (i)(i)(i) takes ai>0a_i > 0ai​>0 units of processing time, has a deadline did_idi​ and a penalty rate pi≥0p_i \ge 0pi​≥0. If (i)(i)(i) is finished at time Ci≤diC_i \le d_iCi​≤di​ there is no loss; otherwise the loss on (i)(i)(i) is pixp_i xpi​x, where x=Ci−dix = C_i - d_ix=Ci​−di​ is the time from the deadline to the completion. Thus the loss on a task completed at time ttt is

ℓi(t)=pimax⁡(0, t−di).\ell_i(t) = p_i \max(0,\ t - d_i).ℓi​(t)=pi​max(0, t−di​).

The ratio of task (i)(i)(i) is ri=pi/air_i = p_i / a_iri​=pi​/ai​.

A task may be split: part of it may run between times 4 and 6 and the remainder between times 8 and 11, and similarly in any finite number of parts. A schedule SSS is therefore a finite list of pieces, each a task together with a start and a stop time. It is feasible when every piece lies in [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) with start ≤\le≤ stop, no two pieces overlap in time, and the pieces of each task (i)(i)(i) have total length exactly aia_iai​. The completion time Ci(S)C_i(S)Ci​(S) is the latest stop time of a piece of (i)(i)(i), and the total loss is

c(S)=∑i=1mℓi(Ci(S)).c(S) = \sum_{i=1}^{m} \ell_i\bigl(C_i(S)\bigr).c(S)=i=1∑m​ℓi​(Ci​(S)).

For an order σ\sigmaσ of the tasks (σ(k)\sigma(k)σ(k) in position kkk), the sequenced schedule SσS_\sigmaSσ​ runs the tasks without splits and without unused time: σ(k)\sigma(k)σ(k) occupies [∑l<kaσ(l), ∑l≤kaσ(l)]\bigl[\sum_{l<k} a_{\sigma(l)},\ \sum_{l\le k} a_{\sigma(l)}\bigr][∑l<k​aσ(l)​, ∑l≤k​aσ(l)​]. The order is in decreasing rir_iri​ when k≤lk \le lk≤l implies rσ(l)≤rσ(k)r_{\sigma(l)} \le r_{\sigma(k)}rσ(l)​≤rσ(k)​. Finally c∗(S)c^*(S)c∗(S) denotes the total loss of SSS computed as if d1=⋯=dm=0d_1 = \dots = d_m = 0d1​=⋯=dm​=0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.4 (p. 5)

If σ\sigmaσ is in decreasing rir_iri​ and no task finishes before its deadline in SσS_\sigmaSσ​, i.e. di≤Ci(Sσ)d_i \le C_i(S_\sigma)di​≤Ci​(Sσ​) for every iii, then SσS_\sigmaSσ​ is feasible and

c(Sσ)≤c(S′)for every feasible schedule S′.c(S_\sigma) \le c(S') \qquad \text{for every feasible schedule } S'.c(Sσ​)≤c(S′)for every feasible schedule S′.

The competitors S′S'S′ may split tasks and leave the processor idle. The condition is sufficient but not necessary.

Milestones, in attack order

  1. Theorem 2.1 (p. 4): if both (i)(i)(i) and (j)(j)(j) run in the ai+aja_i + a_jai​+aj​ consecutive units of time after a time ttt past both deadlines and ri>rjr_i > r_jri​>rj​, their joint loss is strictly smaller when (i)(i)(i) goes first:
ℓi(t+ai)+ℓj(t+ai+aj)<ℓj(t+aj)+ℓi(t+aj+ai).\ell_i(t+a_i) + \ell_j(t+a_i+a_j) < \ell_j(t+a_j) + \ell_i(t+a_j+a_i).ℓi​(t+ai​)+ℓj​(t+ai​+aj​)<ℓj​(t+aj​)+ℓi​(t+aj​+ai​).
  1. The reduction in the proof of Theorem 2.2 (pp. 4–5): a feasible schedule with more than mmm pieces can be replaced by a feasible one with fewer pieces and no greater loss.
  2. Theorem 2.2 (p. 4): some optimal schedule, optimal among all feasible schedules, splits no task.
  3. Theorem 2.3 (p. 5): if d1=⋯=dm=0d_1 = \dots = d_m = 0d1​=⋯=dm​=0, the sequenced schedule in decreasing rir_iri​ minimizes the total loss over all feasible schedules.
  4. The display of the proof of Theorem 2.4 (p. 6): if no task finishes early in S=SσS = S_\sigmaS=Sσ​, then for every feasible S′S'S′,
c(S′)−c(S)≥c∗(S′)−c∗(S).c(S') - c(S) \ge c^*(S') - c^*(S).c(S′)−c(S)≥c∗(S′)−c∗(S).

Significance

The result. Theorem 2.3 is the ratio rule for total weighted completion time, in its strongest single-machine form: it holds against preemptive schedules and schedules with idle time, not only against permutations. Theorem 2.4 carries the rule over to deadlines and linear tardiness penalties under a checkable condition on one schedule. Since weighted tardiness is strongly NP-hard in general, a condition of this kind is what one can hope for, and the paper's two-step heuristic for general deadlines (p. 6) is built on it. Theorem 2.2, as the paper remarks (p. 6), "does not depend on the linear loss function": it makes non-preemptive scheduling without loss of generality for single-machine objectives of this kind.

Formalizing it. All results of §2 are proved in the paper and are textbook material; none has a machine-checked proof on the platform. The platform's Scheduling Algorithms V mission formalizes the multi-processor results of §§3–4 (via Brucker's textbook), and nothing there states a single-processor ratio rule with deadlines. This mission supplies a single-processor schedule model with splitting, the interchange lemma, the non-preemption theorem and the ratio rule, each over all feasible schedules.

Difficulty

The interchange argument of Theorem 2.1 compares only two schedules that differ in the order of two adjacent tasks. Turning it into optimality against every feasible schedule requires two further steps, and each fails if done naively. First, a competitor may split tasks and leave gaps; the interchange argument does not apply to such schedules, so a separate argument must remove splits without raising any completion time. Second, with deadlines the loss max⁡(0,t−di)\max(0, t - d_i)max(0,t−di​) is not linear in the completion time, so the ratio order is in general not optimal; the obvious attempt to repeat the interchange argument fails as soon as a task can finish before its deadline, since moving such a task later costs nothing. This is why Theorem 2.4 needs its hypothesis that no task finishes early, and why the paper leaves the general case to a heuristic.

Formalization scope

Tasks and positions are the zero-based indices of Fin m; times, lengths, deadlines and penalties are real numbers. A schedule is a List of pieces (task, start, stop), mirroring the public definition SchedulingAlgorithms_ParallelMachines with one processor. Feasibility requires 0≤0 \le0≤ start ≤\le≤ stop, pairwise disjoint pieces, and exact total length aia_iai​ per task; zero-length pieces and unsorted lists are allowed. The completion time is the maximum stop time of the task's pieces (000 for a task with no pieces, which feasibility excludes). "No split" means exactly one piece per task, so two abutting pieces count as a split. "Decreasing rir_iri​" is non-increasing, with ties in any order. "Minimal" and "optimal" are stated as ≤\le≤ against every feasible schedule, never as an infimum.

Standing assumptions, stated in every item: ai>0a_i > 0ai​>0 (tasks take time, and ri=pi/air_i = p_i/a_iri​=pi​/ai​ needs ai≠0a_i \ne 0ai​=0), and pi≥0p_i \ge 0pi​≥0 for Theorems 2.2–2.4 and the proof steps (penalties are non-negative; with a negative penalty and idle time allowed the loss is unbounded below). Theorem 2.1 carries no sign condition. No condition is placed on the deadlines.

A formalization that restricts the competitors of Theorems 2.2–2.4 to unsplit schedules, or to sequenced schedules of other orders, states a weaker theorem and is ruled out: every statement quantifies over all feasible schedules.

A complete development needs: sums over sublists of pieces, rearrangements of pieces of a schedule and their effect on completion times, and optimality over permutations of a finite set of tasks. The schedule model and the non-preemption argument are reusable for any single-machine regular objective. Contributions of intermediate lemmas on these points are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. McNaughton, Scheduling with Deadlines and Loss Functions, Management Science 6(1):1–12, 1959. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.6.1.1
  • W. E. Smith, Various optimizers for single-stage production, Naval Research Logistics Quarterly 3(1–2):59–66, 1956. https://doi.org/10.1002/nav.3800030106
  • J. K. Lenstra, A. H. G. Rinnooy Kan, P. Brucker, Complexity of machine scheduling problems, Annals of Discrete Mathematics 1:343–362, 1977. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0167-5060(08)70743-X
  • P. Brucker, Scheduling Algorithms, 5th ed., Springer, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-540-69516-5
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Control TheoryConvex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Robust Solutions to Uncertain Semidefinite Programs II: An SDP Inner Approximation of the Robust Feasible Set under Structured PerturbationsResearch Paper

Motivation

A semidefinite program (SDP) minimizes a linear objective cTxc^TxcTx subject to a linear matrix inequality F(x)=F0+∑i=1mxiFi⪰0F(x) = F_0 + \sum_{i=1}^m x_i F_i \succeq 0F(x)=F0​+∑i=1m​xi​Fi​⪰0. In engineering applications the coefficient matrices are rarely known exactly: they come from measurements, from a model of a physical plant, or from a finite-precision implementation. El Ghaoui, Oustry and Lebret (SIAM J. Optim. 9(1), 1998) asked for solutions that remain feasible for every admissible value of the uncertain data, and showed how to compute such robust solutions by semidefinite programming. The paper appeared alongside Ben-Tal and Nemirovski's robust convex programming (Math. Oper. Res. 23(4), 1998) and is one of the two founding treatments of robust SDP.

When the uncertainty has structure (a block-diagonal perturbation, repeated scalar parameters, a symmetric matrix), the exact robust problem is NP-hard (El Ghaoui and Lebret, SIAM J. Matrix Anal. Appl. 18, 1997). This is the same obstacle that robust control meets in computing the structured singular value, and the remedy the paper uses, scaling matrices that commute with the perturbation structure, goes back to that literature (Doyle, IEE Proc. D 129, 1982; Fan, Tits and Doyle, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 36, 1991). This mission formalizes the resulting tractable conservative approximation, Theorem 3.2 of the paper, together with the lemma it rests on and an application to integer feasibility problems.

Setting

Fix natural numbers m,n,p,qm, n, p, qm,n,p,q. The decision variable is x∈Rmx \in \mathbb{R}^mx∈Rm. The nominal data are affine maps

F(x)=F0+∑i=1mxiFi∈Rn×n,R(x)=R0+∑i=1mxiRi∈Rq×n,F(x) = F_0 + \sum_{i=1}^m x_i F_i \in \mathbb{R}^{n\times n}, \qquad R(x) = R_0 + \sum_{i=1}^m x_i R_i \in \mathbb{R}^{q\times n},F(x)=F0​+i=1∑m​xi​Fi​∈Rn×n,R(x)=R0​+i=1∑m​xi​Ri​∈Rq×n,

with every FiF_iFi​ symmetric, and fixed matrices L∈Rn×pL \in \mathbb{R}^{n\times p}L∈Rn×p, D∈Rq×pD \in \mathbb{R}^{q\times p}D∈Rq×p. A perturbation is a matrix Δ∈Rp×q\Delta \in \mathbb{R}^{p\times q}Δ∈Rp×q, and the perturbed constraint matrix is the linear-fractional representation (LFR)

F(x,Δ)=F(x)+LΔ(I−DΔ)−1R(x)+R(x)T(I−ΔTDT)−1ΔTLT,\mathbf{F}(x,\Delta) = F(x) + L\Delta(I - D\Delta)^{-1}R(x) + R(x)^T(I - \Delta^TD^T)^{-1}\Delta^TL^T,F(x,Δ)=F(x)+LΔ(I−DΔ)−1R(x)+R(x)T(I−ΔTDT)−1ΔTLT,

which is defined when det⁡(I−DΔ)≠0\det(I - D\Delta) \neq 0det(I−DΔ)=0. The perturbation ranges over a linear subspace D⊆Rp×q\mathcal{D} \subseteq \mathbb{R}^{p\times q}D⊆Rp×q, which encodes the structure, and is bounded by a level ρ>0\rho > 0ρ>0 in the spectral norm ∥Δ∥\|\Delta\|∥Δ∥ (the largest singular value). The robust feasible set is

Xρ={x:for every Δ∈D with ∥Δ∥≤ρ, det⁡(I−DΔ)≠0 and F(x,Δ)⪰0},\mathcal{X}_\rho = \{x : \text{for every } \Delta \in \mathcal{D} \text{ with } \|\Delta\| \le \rho,\ \det(I - D\Delta) \neq 0 \text{ and } \mathbf{F}(x,\Delta) \succeq 0\},Xρ​={x:for every Δ∈D with ∥Δ∥≤ρ, det(I−DΔ)=0 and F(x,Δ)⪰0},

and the robust SDP (RSDP) is to minimize cTxc^TxcTx over Xρ\mathcal{X}_\rhoXρ​.

The scaling set of D\mathcal{D}D is the linear subspace

B={(S,T,G)∈Rp×p×Rq×q×Rp×q:SΔ=ΔT, GΔT=−ΔGT for every Δ∈D}.\mathcal{B} = \{(S,T,G) \in \mathbb{R}^{p\times p}\times\mathbb{R}^{q\times q}\times\mathbb{R}^{p\times q} : S\Delta = \Delta T,\ G\Delta^T = -\Delta G^T \text{ for every } \Delta \in \mathcal{D}\}.B={(S,T,G)∈Rp×p×Rq×q×Rp×q:SΔ=ΔT, GΔT=−ΔGT for every Δ∈D}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2 (p. 37), as an inclusion of feasible sets

For every xxx: if some (S,T,G)∈B(S,T,G) \in \mathcal{B}(S,T,G)∈B has S≻0S \succ 0S≻0, T≻0T \succ 0T≻0 and

[F(x)−LSLTR(x)T−LSDT+LGR(x)−DSLT+GTLTρ−2T−DSDT+DG+GTDT]≻0,\begin{bmatrix} F(x) - LSL^T & R(x)^T - LSD^T + LG \\ R(x) - DSL^T + G^TL^T & \rho^{-2}T - DSD^T + DG + G^TD^T\end{bmatrix} \succ 0,[F(x)−LSLTR(x)−DSLT+GTLT​R(x)T−LSDT+LGρ−2T−DSDT+DG+GTDT​]≻0,

then x∈Xρx \in \mathcal{X}_\rhox∈Xρ​, and in fact F(x,Δ)≻0\mathbf{F}(x,\Delta) \succ 0F(x,Δ)≻0 for every Δ∈D\Delta \in \mathcal{D}Δ∈D with ∥Δ∥≤ρ\|\Delta\| \le \rho∥Δ∥≤ρ. A companion item states the consequence for optimal values: the SDP value is an upper bound on the RSDP value, with both infima taken in the extended reals.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 3.2 (p. 37): the same implication for constant FFF, RRR and ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1, with the matrix (13).
  2. The full-perturbation case (p. 37): for D=Rp×q\mathcal{D} = \mathbb{R}^{p\times q}D=Rp×q and p,q≥1p, q \ge 1p,q≥1, B\mathcal{B}B consists exactly of the triples (τIp,τIq,0)(\tau I_p, \tau I_q, 0)(τIp​,τIq​,0), with τ≥0\tau \ge 0τ≥0 when S⪰0S \succeq 0S⪰0.
  3. Theorem 5.6 (p. 48): if Fi=2LiRiF_i = 2L_iR_iFi​=2Li​Ri​ with ri=rank⁡Fir_i = \operatorname{rank} F_iri​=rankFi​, and xfeasx_{\mathrm{feas}}xfeas​ satisfies, for some λ≥0\lambda \ge 0λ≥0 and block-diagonal S=STS = S^TS=ST, G=−GTG = -G^TG=−GT,
[F(xfeas)−λI−LSLT12RT+LG12R−GLTS]≻0,\begin{bmatrix} F(x_{\mathrm{feas}}) - \lambda I - LSL^T & \tfrac12R^T + LG \\ \tfrac12R - GL^T & S\end{bmatrix} \succ 0,[F(xfeas​)−λI−LSLT21​R−GLT​21​RT+LGS​]≻0,

then every integer vector closest to xfeasx_{\mathrm{feas}}xfeas​ in the maximum norm satisfies F(z)⪰0F(z) \succeq 0F(z)⪰0.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3.2 replaces an NP-hard semi-infinite constraint, one matrix inequality for each admissible perturbation, by a single linear matrix inequality in the enlarged variable (x,S,T,G)(x, S, T, G)(x,S,T,G). Every point it certifies is robustly feasible, so its optimal value is a certified upper bound on the robust optimum and its optimizer is a usable robust solution. In the full case the scalings collapse to one multiplier τ\tauτ (milestone 2), which connects the bound to the exact reformulation of Section 3.1 of the paper. Theorem 5.6 shows the same machinery at work on a combinatorial problem: robustness against perturbations of size 1/21/21/2 in each coordinate of xxx turns an SDP-feasible point into an integer solution by rounding.

Formalizing it. The results are proved in the paper (Lemma 3.2 with the proof deferred to [16]); none of them has a machine-checked proof that this mission is aware of, and the platform has no linear-fractional or structured-perturbation results. The formalization also settles the exact form of the certificate: as printed, the matrix (13) and the LMI of Theorem 3.2 contain products that are dimensionally undefined, and this mission states the condition the proof actually yields (see the scope section).

Difficulty

The inequality to be proved is a statement about infinitely many perturbations, and F(x,Δ)\mathbf{F}(x,\Delta)F(x,Δ) depends on Δ\DeltaΔ through a matrix inverse. The natural first step, eliminating Δ\DeltaΔ by an exact S-procedure as in the full case, is not available: with a structured D\mathcal{D}D the set of pairs of vectors linked by some Δ∈D\Delta \in \mathcal{D}Δ∈D is not described by one quadratic inequality, and losslessness fails. The scalings in B\mathcal{B}B give several valid quadratic inequalities instead, and one must show that their combination controls every Δ\DeltaΔ in the norm ball, including the well-posedness claim det⁡(I−DΔ)≠0\det(I - D\Delta) \neq 0det(I−DΔ)=0, which is part of the conclusion rather than an assumption. The commutation condition SΔ=ΔTS\Delta = \Delta TSΔ=ΔT must be turned into an inequality for ∥Δ∥≤1\|\Delta\| \le 1∥Δ∥≤1, which requires more than the definition of the spectral norm. For Theorem 5.6 the block-diagonal perturbation family and the rescaling between ρ=1/2\rho = 1/2ρ=1/2 and the stated matrix must be matched to the general lemma.

Formalization scope

Matrices are Matrix (Fin a) (Fin b) ℝ; ≻0\succ 0≻0 and ⪰0\succeq 0⪰0 are Matrix.PosDef and Matrix.PosSemidef (both include symmetry); block matrices are Matrix.fromBlocks on Fin n ⊕ Fin q. The norm of a perturbation is the ℓ2\ell^2ℓ2 operator norm (open scoped Matrix.Norms.L2Operator), i.e. the largest singular value; the maximum norm in Theorem 5.6 is Mathlib's sup norm on Fin m → ℝ. D\mathcal{D}D is a Submodule. Affine maps are given by coefficient families indexed by Fin (m+1). Mathlib's matrix inverse is 000 at a singular matrix, so every statement pairs the LFR with det⁡(I−DΔ)≠0\det(I - D\Delta) \neq 0det(I−DΔ)=0. The standing assumption ρ>0\rho > 0ρ>0 of Section 3 is a hypothesis.

Readings and corrections of the printed statements:

  • (13) as printed is dimensionally inconsistent; we state the condition the proof yields, which coincides with the printed one when GGG is square and skew-symmetric and D\mathcal{D}D consists of symmetric matrices. Concretely, (11) prints G∈Rq×pG \in \mathbb{R}^{q\times p}G∈Rq×p with GΔ=−ΔTGTG\Delta = -\Delta^TG^TGΔ=−ΔTGT and (13) prints the blocks R−DSL−GLTR - DSL - GL^TR−DSL−GLT and T−GDT+DG−DSDTT - GD^T + DG - DSD^TT−GDT+DG−DSDT; the mission uses G∈Rp×qG \in \mathbb{R}^{p\times q}G∈Rp×q with GΔT=−ΔGTG\Delta^T = -\Delta G^TGΔT=−ΔGT and the blocks R−DSLT+GTLTR - DSL^T + G^TL^TR−DSLT+GTLT and T−DSDT+DG+GTDTT - DSD^T + DG + G^TD^TT−DSDT+DG+GTDT. The same correction applies to the LMI of Theorem 3.2 (with ρ−2T\rho^{-2}Tρ−2T). Theorem 5.6 is stated as printed.
  • "An upper bound on the RSDP (4) and a corresponding solution xxx can be computed by solving the SDP" is read as the inclusion of the SDP's feasible projection in Xρ\mathcal{X}_\rhoXρ​, for every xxx; the goal states it with the strict conclusion F(x,Δ)≻0\mathbf{F}(x,\Delta) \succ 0F(x,Δ)≻0 as well. The value form is a separate item.
  • In the full-perturbation remark, "for some τ≥0\tau \ge 0τ≥0" is stated under S⪰0S \succeq 0S⪰0, and "We then recover the exact results of section 3.1" is not formalized.
  • In Theorem 5.6, S\mathcal{S}S's index range "i=1,…,ni = 1,\dots,ni=1,…,n" is read as i=1,…,mi = 1,\dots,mi=1,…,m; the hypothesis ri=rank⁡Fir_i = \operatorname{rank}F_iri​=rankFi​ is kept.

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out: (0,0,0)∈B(0,0,0) \in \mathcal{B}(0,0,0)∈B always, so the hypotheses S≻0S \succ 0S≻0 and T≻0T \succ 0T≻0 are kept outside B\mathcal{B}B; D\mathcal{D}D is a subspace, not an arbitrary set; and the norm is the spectral norm, not Mathlib's default entrywise norm.

A complete development needs the square root of a positive definite matrix and its commutation with SSS and TTT, the spectral-norm characterization ΔΔT⪯∥Δ∥2I\Delta\Delta^T \preceq \|\Delta\|^2 IΔΔT⪯∥Δ∥2I, Schur-complement and congruence facts for block matrices, and a linear-fractional identity relating (I−DΔ)−1(I - D\Delta)^{-1}(I−DΔ)−1 to an auxiliary vector. These are reusable well beyond this mission; contributions of any of them, and of the value and rounding corollaries, are welcome.

Selected references

  • L. El Ghaoui, F. Oustry, H. Lebret, Robust Solutions to Uncertain Semidefinite Programs, SIAM J. Optim. 9(1):33–52, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623496305717
  • L. El Ghaoui, H. Lebret, Robust solutions to least-squares problems with uncertain data, SIAM J. Matrix Anal. Appl. 18:1035–1064, 1997. https://doi.org/10.1137/S0895479896298130
  • M. K. H. Fan, A. L. Tits, J. C. Doyle, Robustness in the presence of mixed parametric uncertainty and unmodeled dynamics, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 36:25–38, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.62265
  • J. C. Doyle, Analysis of feedback systems with structured uncertainties, IEE Proc. D 129(6):242–250, 1982. https://doi.org/10.1049/ip-d.1982.0053
  • A. Ben-Tal, A. Nemirovski, Robust convex optimization, Math. Oper. Res. 23(4):769–805, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.23.4.769
  • S. Boyd, L. El Ghaoui, E. Feron, V. Balakrishnan, Linear Matrix Inequalities in System and Control Theory, SIAM, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970777
5 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationLinear OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Validation of Subgradient Optimization I: The Core Problem Built from the Subgradient Iterates Solves the Dual Linear ProgramResearch Paper

Motivation

Subgradient optimization maximizes a concave function that is not differentiable by stepping along an arbitrary subgradient with a prescribed sequence of step sizes. It became a standard tool of integer programming after Held and Karp used it to compute the Lagrangian 1-tree bound for the traveling-salesman problem (Held & Karp 1971). Held, Wolfe and Crowder then tested it on the assignment problem, a traveling-salesman relaxation and a multicommodity flow problem (Held, Wolfe & Crowder 1974).

The method has one practical defect that the paper names at the start of its Section 6: it contains no test of optimality. The value w(πj)w(\pi^j)w(πj) approaches the maximum, but at no finite step does the method say that the maximum has been reached, or what the maximum is. Section 6 of the paper supplies such a test for the case where www is a minimum of finitely many affine functions. The finitely many subgradients produced by the iterates define a small linear program, the core problem, and from some iteration on this linear program already solves the full dual linear program. Its optimal value is therefore the exact maximum of www, obtained from quantities the method computes anyway. This is how the authors certified the optimal values reported in their experiments.

Timeline:

  • 1967–1969: Poljak proves that the subgradient iterates satisfy w(πj)→max⁡ww(\pi^j)\to\max ww(πj)→maxw when the step sizes tend to zero and have divergent sum (Poljak 1967; Poljak 1969).
  • 1971: Held and Karp apply the method to the 1-tree bound (Held & Karp 1971).
  • 1974: Held, Wolfe and Crowder prove that the core problem P(J,J∗)P(J,J^*)P(J,J∗) solves the dual linear program (Theorem 6.3) and give a sufficient condition for bounded iterates (Theorem 6.1).
  • 1996–1999: primal recovery from subgradient iterates is developed further, by convex combinations of the subgradients with weights derived from the step sizes (Sherali & Choi 1996; Larsson, Patriksson & Strömberg 1999).

Setting

Fix n≥0n\ge0n≥0 and write En=RnE^n=\mathbb R^nEn=Rn with the Euclidean inner product π⋅v\pi\cdot vπ⋅v. The data are K≥1K\ge1K≥1 scalars ckc_kck​ and vectors vk∈Env_k\in E^nvk​∈En, and

w(π)=min⁡{ck+π⋅vk:k=1,…,K}.(2.2)w(\pi)=\min\{c_k+\pi\cdot v_k : k=1,\dots,K\}.\qquad(2.2)w(π)=min{ck​+π⋅vk​:k=1,…,K}.(2.2)

The function www is assumed bounded above, the paper's standing assumption. An index kkk attains the minimum at π\piπ if ck+π⋅vk=w(π)c_k+\pi\cdot v_k=w(\pi)ck​+π⋅vk​=w(π).

A run of the subgradient algorithm consists of a starting point π0∈En\pi^0\in E^nπ0∈En, step sizes tj>0t_j>0tj​>0 and indices k(j)k(j)k(j) such that k(j)k(j)k(j) attains the minimum at πj\pi^jπj, and

πj+1=πj+tj vk(j)(j=0,1,… ).(2.6)\pi^{j+1}=\pi^j+t_j\,v_{k(j)}\qquad(j=0,1,\dots).\qquad(2.6)πj+1=πj+tj​vk(j)​(j=0,1,…).(2.6)

No rule for choosing among several minimizing indices is imposed. Write vj=vk(j)v^j=v_{k(j)}vj=vk(j)​ and cj=ck(j)c^j=c_{k(j)}cj=ck(j)​. The step-size conditions are

tj→0,∑j=0∞tj=∞.(2.7)t_j\to0,\qquad \sum_{j=0}^\infty t_j=\infty.\qquad(2.7)tj​→0,j=0∑∞​tj​=∞.(2.7)

The dual linear program of max⁡w\max wmaxw is

min⁡{∑kckyk:yk≥0, ∑kyk=1, ∑kykvk=0}.(6.1)\min\Big\{\sum_k c_ky_k : y_k\ge0,\ \sum_ky_k=1,\ \sum_ky_kv_k=0\Big\}.\qquad(6.1)min{k∑​ck​yk​:yk​≥0, k∑​yk​=1, k∑​yk​vk​=0}.(6.1)

For integers J<J∗J<J^*J<J∗ the core problem P(J,J∗)P(J,J^*)P(J,J∗) has one variable yjy_jyj​ for each iteration j∈[J,J∗]j\in[J,J^*]j∈[J,J∗]:

min⁡{∑j=JJ∗cjyj:yj≥0, ∑j=JJ∗yj=1, ∑j=JJ∗yjvj=0}.\min\Big\{\sum_{j=J}^{J^*}c^jy_j : y_j\ge0,\ \sum_{j=J}^{J^*}y_j=1,\ \sum_{j=J}^{J^*}y_jv^j=0\Big\}.min{j=J∑J∗​cjyj​:yj​≥0, j=J∑J∗​yj​=1, j=J∑J∗​yj​vj=0}.

An index chosen at several iterations contributes several identical columns. A point yyy of P(J,J∗)P(J,J^*)P(J,J∗) is sent to the point yˉk=∑{yj:J≤j≤J∗, k(j)=k}\bar y_k=\sum\{y_j : J\le j\le J^*,\ k(j)=k\}yˉ​k​=∑{yj​:J≤j≤J∗, k(j)=k} of (6.1). This aggregation preserves feasibility and objective value.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.3 (p. 82)

Assume www is bounded above, (tj,πj,k(j))(t_j,\pi^j,k(j))(tj​,πj,k(j)) is a run satisfying (2.7), and {πj}\{\pi^j\}{πj} is bounded. Then

∀J ∃J∗>J:P(J,J∗) has a solution, and every solution of P(J,J∗) aggregates to a solution of (6.1).\forall J\ \exists J^*>J:\quad P(J,J^*)\text{ has a solution, and every solution of }P(J,J^*)\text{ aggregates to a solution of (6.1)}.∀J ∃J∗>J:P(J,J∗) has a solution, and every solution of P(J,J∗) aggregates to a solution of (6.1).

The goal states existence of J∗J^*J∗, which is what the paper claims. The paper's argument in fact gives the conclusion for every sufficiently large J∗J^*J∗. That stronger form is not the goal. Feasibility of P(J,J∗)P(J,J^*)P(J,J∗) (Lemma 6.2) or the inequality Value[P(J,J∗)]≥Value[(6.1)]\mathrm{Value}[P(J,J^*)]\ge\mathrm{Value}[(6.1)]Value[P(J,J∗)]≥Value[(6.1)], which holds for every feasible P(J,J∗)P(J,J^*)P(J,J∗), is not a formalization of the goal. The content is optimality in (6.1).

Milestones

  1. Eq. (2.10): if π∗\pi^*π∗ maximizes www and kkk attains the minimum at π\piπ, then w∗−w(π)≤vk⋅(π∗−π)w^*-w(\pi)\le v_k\cdot(\pi^*-\pi)w∗−w(π)≤vk​⋅(π∗−π).
  2. §6, p. 80 (display): under (2.6), (2.7) and www bounded above, lim⁡jw(πj)=max⁡w=w(π∗)\lim_j w(\pi^j)=\max w=w(\pi^*)limj​w(πj)=maxw=w(π∗) for some π∗\pi^*π∗. The iterates are not assumed bounded.
  3. Theorem 6.1: if every π≠0\pi\ne0π=0 has some π⋅vk<0\pi\cdot v_k<0π⋅vk​<0, every run satisfying (2.7) is bounded.
  4. Eq. (6.1): (6.1) has a solution, and its optimal value equals max⁡w\max wmaxw.
  5. Lemma 6.2: for any JJJ there is J∗>JJ^*>JJ∗>J with P(J,J∗)P(J,J^*)P(J,J∗) feasible, for bounded runs.

Significance

Theorem 6.3 turns an asymptotic method into one that returns an exact answer. Solving P(J,J∗)P(J,J^*)P(J,J∗) for growing J∗J^*J∗ produces a linear program of bounded size whose optimum is eventually the optimum of (6.1), and hence max⁡w\max wmaxw. In the Lagrangian applications, where (6.1) is the linear relaxation of a combinatorial problem, this yields both the bound and a primal solution of the relaxation. The theorem is the ancestor of the primal-recovery results listed in the timeline.

The mission produces a machine-checked version of the paper's Section 6, together with the input the paper takes on citation: Poljak's convergence theorem for divergent-series step sizes, specialized to piecewise-linear concave functions. Neither Poljak's theorem nor Theorem 6.3 is in Mathlib. The pieces are reusable: the convergence theorem applies to every Lagrangian dual solved by subgradient steps, and the duality between max⁡w\max wmaxw and (6.1) is linear-programming duality for a minimum of affine functions.

Difficulty

The inequality Value⁡P(J,J∗)≥Value⁡(6.1)\operatorname{Value}P(J,J^*)\ge\operatorname{Value}(6.1)ValueP(J,J∗)≥Value(6.1) is immediate, since aggregation maps feasible points to feasible points with the same objective. All of the content lies in the reverse inequality. That inequality ties a finite linear program to the limit of an infinite sequence, and it must hold for an arbitrary choice among tied minimizing indices. The iterates themselves need not converge, and under (2.7) the values w(πj)w(\pi^j)w(πj) are not monotone. So an argument that inspects a single iterate, or assumes that the method settles on one face of www, fails. The convergence statement of milestone 2 is not proved in the paper and is the heaviest single step. Feasibility of P(J,J∗)P(J,J^*)P(J,J∗) also needs its own argument, and it fails without the boundedness hypothesis.

Formalization scope

EnE^nEn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), the index set is a finite nonempty type ι, and www is the finite minimum Finset.univ.inf'. A run is the predicate IsSubgradientRun c v t π k: positive steps, a minimizing index at every step, and update (2.6). It is not a function of π0\pi^0π0, so every tie-breaking rule is covered. (2.7) is StepSizeCond t: t → 0, and the partial sums tend to +∞+\infty+∞. Iterates are indexed from j=0j=0j=0. Boundedness is Bornology.IsBounded (Set.range π). The variables of P(J,J∗)P(J,J^*)P(J,J∗) are a function on N\mathbb NN of which only the values at J≤j≤J∗J\le j\le J^*J≤j≤J∗ enter. Optimality of yyy in either linear program means feasibility plus an objective no larger than that of every feasible point. Suprema are never taken over unbounded sets: every maximum of www is stated as attained at an explicit π∗\pi^*π∗.

A statement that only asserts feasibility of P(J,J∗)P(J,J^*)P(J,J∗), or only Value⁡P≥Value⁡(6.1)\operatorname{Value}P\ge\operatorname{Value}(6.1)ValueP≥Value(6.1), is not the theorem. The goal requires that the solutions of P(J,J∗)P(J,J^*)P(J,J∗) be optimal for (6.1).

Theorem 6.1 is printed for the step rule (2.8), but its proof uses w(πj)→w∗w(\pi^j)\to w^*w(πj)→w∗, the consequence of (2.7). The mission states it for (2.7), and its milestone title says so.

A complete development needs:

  • linear-programming duality for (6.1), including attainment;
  • the convergence theorem for divergent-series step sizes;
  • existence of a maximizer of a bounded-above minimum of finitely many affine functions;
  • basic facts on convex hulls of finitely many vectors in EnE^nEn.

The first three are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions of any of them, as standalone theorems, are welcome.

Selected references

  • M. Held, P. Wolfe, H. P. Crowder, Validation of subgradient optimization, Mathematical Programming 6 (1974) 62–88. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01580223
  • M. Held, R. M. Karp, The traveling-salesman problem and minimum spanning trees: Part II, Mathematical Programming 1 (1971) 6–25. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01584070
  • B. T. Poljak, A general method of solving extremum problems, Soviet Mathematics Doklady 8 (1967) 593–597.
  • B. T. Poljak, Minimization of unsmooth functionals, USSR Computational Mathematics and Mathematical Physics 9 (1969) 14–29. https://doi.org/10.1016/0041-5553(69)90061-5
  • H. D. Sherali, G. Choi, Recovery of primal solutions when using subgradient optimization methods to solve Lagrangian duals of linear programs, Operations Research Letters 19 (1996) 105–113. https://doi.org/10.1016/0167-6377(96)00019-3
  • T. Larsson, M. Patriksson, A.-B. Strömberg, Ergodic, primal convergence in dual subgradient schemes for convex programming, Mathematical Programming 86 (1999) 283–312. https://doi.org/10.1007/s101070050090
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationLinear algebraNumerical Analysis+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Robust Solutions to Least-Squares Problems with Uncertain Data II: Robust Least Squares as Tikhonov RegularizationResearch Paper

Motivation

Least squares fits a linear model Ax≃bAx \simeq bAx≃b by minimizing ∥Ax−b∥\|Ax - b\|∥Ax−b∥, and its solution can be extremely sensitive to errors in the data (A,b)(A, b)(A,b) when AAA is ill-conditioned. The standard remedy is Tikhonov regularization (ridge regression): minimize ∥Ax−b∥2+μ∥x∥2\|Ax - b\|^2 + \mu\|x\|^2∥Ax−b∥2+μ∥x∥2, whose solution x=(A⊤A+μI)−1A⊤bx = (A^\top A + \mu I)^{-1}A^\top bx=(A⊤A+μI)−1A⊤b is stable but depends on a parameter μ>0\mu > 0μ>0 that must be chosen by some external rule.

El Ghaoui and Lebret (SIAM J. Matrix Anal. Appl. 18(4), 1997) proposed instead to take the uncertainty in (A,b)(A, b)(A,b) seriously: the robust least-squares (RLS) solution minimizes the worst-case residual over all perturbations [ΔA Δb][\Delta A\ \Delta b][ΔA Δb] of Frobenius norm at most ρ\rhoρ. Their Theorem 3.1 shows that for ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1 this worst-case residual equals ∥Ax−b∥+∥x∥2+1\|Ax - b\| + \sqrt{\|x\|^2 + 1}∥Ax−b∥+∥x∥2+1​ and that its minimization is the second-order cone program (15). Theorem 3.2, the subject of this mission, reads off the optimal solution: it is a Tikhonov-regularized solution, and the regularization parameter is not a free choice but is fixed by the data. This gives a principled answer to the question of how to choose μ\muμ, and it is the reason the paper describes RLS as "a Tikhonov regularization procedure" with "a rigorous way to compute the regularization parameter" (abstract, p. 1035).

A closely related model for least squares with bounded data uncertainty was developed at the same time by Chandrasekaran, Golub, Gu and Sayed; the paper notes that their preliminary draft (its reference [5]) gives a solution to the unstructured RLS problem similar to that of §3.2 (pp. 1036–1037).

Setting

Throughout, A∈Rn×mA \in \mathbb R^{n\times m}A∈Rn×m, b∈Rnb \in \mathbb R^nb∈Rn, x∈Rmx \in \mathbb R^mx∈Rm, and every vector norm is Euclidean, ∥v∥=∑ivi2\|v\| = \sqrt{\sum_i v_i^2}∥v∥=∑i​vi2​​. For x∈Rmx \in \mathbb R^mx∈Rm, [x;1]∈Rm+1[x; 1] \in \mathbb R^{m+1}[x;1]∈Rm+1 is xxx with a coordinate 111 appended, so ∥[x;1]∥=∥x∥2+1\|[x;1]\| = \sqrt{\|x\|^2 + 1}∥[x;1]∥=∥x∥2+1​.

The SOCP (15) is the problem, in the variables x∈Rmx \in \mathbb R^mx∈Rm and λ,τ∈R\lambda, \tau \in \mathbb Rλ,τ∈R,

minimize λsubject to∥Ax−b∥≤λ−τ,∥[x;1]∥≤τ.\text{minimize } \lambda \quad\text{subject to}\quad \|Ax - b\| \le \lambda - \tau,\qquad \|[x;1]\| \le \tau.minimize λsubject to∥Ax−b∥≤λ−τ,∥[x;1]∥≤τ.

A triple (x,λ,τ)(x, \lambda, \tau)(x,λ,τ) is optimal for (15) if it is feasible and λ≤λ′\lambda \le \lambda'λ≤λ′ for every feasible (x′,λ′,τ′)(x', \lambda', \tau')(x′,λ′,τ′). Its dual, derived in the paper from the general second-order cone duality of §2.1, is the problem in z∈Rnz \in \mathbb R^nz∈Rn, u∈Rmu \in \mathbb R^mu∈Rm, v∈Rv \in \mathbb Rv∈R

maximize b⊤z−vsubject toA⊤z+u=0,∥z∥≤1,∥[u;v]∥≤1.\text{maximize } b^\top z - v \quad\text{subject to}\quad A^\top z + u = 0,\quad \|z\| \le 1,\quad \|[u; v]\| \le 1.maximize b⊤z−vsubject toA⊤z+u=0,∥z∥≤1,∥[u;v]∥≤1.

The minimum-norm solution of Ax=bAx = bAx=b is a solution xxx with ∥x∥≤∥y∥\|x\| \le \|y\|∥x∥≤∥y∥ for every other solution yyy; when Ax=bAx = bAx=b is consistent it is A†bA^\dagger bA†b, with A†A^\daggerA† the Moore–Penrose pseudoinverse.

In the Lean development these objects are IsSOCPFeasible, IsSOCPOptimal, IsDualFeasible, dualObjective, IsDualOptimal and IsMinNormSolution, in the namespace RobustLS.Tikhonov, with the Euclidean norm eucNorm.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2 with the identity for μ\muμ

Let (x,λ,τ)(x, \lambda, \tau)(x,λ,τ) be optimal for (15) and set μ=(λ−τ)/τ\mu = (\lambda - \tau)/\tauμ=(λ−τ)/τ. Then

x={(μI+A⊤A)−1A⊤bif μ>0,A†belse,andμ=∥Ax−b∥∥x∥2+1.x = \begin{cases} (\mu I + A^\top A)^{-1}A^\top b & \text{if } \mu > 0,\\ A^\dagger b & \text{else,}\end{cases}\qquad\text{and}\qquad \mu = \frac{\|Ax - b\|}{\sqrt{\|x\|^2 + 1}}.x={(μI+A⊤A)−1A⊤bA†b​if μ>0,else,​andμ=∥x∥2+1​∥Ax−b∥​.

By Theorem 3.1 (the subject of the companion mission I of this series), the xxx-part of an optimal point of (15) is the RLS solution for ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1, so this is formula (17) of the paper. The identity for μ\muμ is the final display of the paper's proof and is the claim in the mission's title.

Milestones (in the order of the paper's proof, p. 1041)

  1. Both (15) and its dual have optimal points.
  2. If λ=τ\lambda = \tauλ=τ at the optimum, then Ax=bAx = bAx=b and λ=τ=∥x∥2+1\lambda = \tau = \sqrt{\|x\|^2 + 1}λ=τ=∥x∥2+1​.
  3. In that case xxx is the minimum-norm solution of Ax=bAx = bAx=b, x=A†bx = A^\dagger bx=A†b.
  4. Eq. (18): for λ>τ\lambda > \tauλ>τ, primal and dual optimal values coincide,
∥Ax−b∥+∥[x;1]∥=λ=b⊤z−v=−(Ax−b)⊤z−[x⊤ 1][−A⊤zv].\|Ax - b\| + \|[x;1]\| = \lambda = b^\top z - v = -(Ax-b)^\top z - [x^\top\ 1]\begin{bmatrix} -A^\top z\\ v\end{bmatrix}.∥Ax−b∥+∥[x;1]∥=λ=b⊤z−v=−(Ax−b)⊤z−[x⊤ 1][−A⊤zv​].
  1. The dual optimal point is z=−(Ax−b)/∥Ax−b∥z = -(Ax - b)/\|Ax - b\|z=−(Ax−b)/∥Ax−b∥, [u;v]=−[x;1]/∥x∥2+1[u; v] = -[x; 1]/\sqrt{\|x\|^2 + 1}[u;v]=−[x;1]/∥x∥2+1​.
  2. Substituting into A⊤z+u=0A^\top z + u = 0A⊤z+u=0: x=(A⊤A+μI)−1A⊤bx = (A^\top A + \mu I)^{-1}A^\top bx=(A⊤A+μI)−1A⊤b with μ=(λ−τ)/τ=∥Ax−b∥/∥x∥2+1\mu = (\lambda - \tau)/\tau = \|Ax - b\|/\sqrt{\|x\|^2 + 1}μ=(λ−τ)/τ=∥Ax−b∥/∥x∥2+1​.

A further item states Remark 3.1: for λ>τ\lambda > \tauλ>τ, xxx is the unique minimizer of the weighted residual ∥[A;I;0]y−[b;0;1]∥Θ\big\|[A; I; 0]y - [b; 0; 1]\big\|_\Theta​[A;I;0]y−[b;0;1]​Θ​ with Θ=diag((λ−τ)I,τI,τ)\Theta = \mathbf{diag}((\lambda-\tau)I, \tau I, \tau)Θ=diag((λ−τ)I,τI,τ) and ∥r∥Θ=∥Θ−1/2r∥\|r\|_\Theta = \|\Theta^{-1/2} r\|∥r∥Θ​=∥Θ−1/2r∥.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3.2 turns a robust optimization problem into a familiar linear-algebra object. It says that the robust solution always lies on the Tikhonov path {(A⊤A+μI)−1A⊤b:μ>0}\{(A^\top A + \mu I)^{-1}A^\top b : \mu > 0\}{(A⊤A+μI)−1A⊤b:μ>0} or at its endpoint A†bA^\dagger bA†b, and it identifies the point on the path through a fixed-point equation relating μ\muμ to the residual and the size of the solution. The paper builds on this in §3.3 (a one-dimensional search for μ\muμ via the SVD) and in §6 (continuity of the RLS solution in the data), and Remark 3.1 is the template for the weighted least-squares interpretation of the structured and linear-fractional problems in §5.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper; to our knowledge it has no machine-checked proof. The mission produces a formal account of second-order cone duality for a concrete program, the characterization of the optimal dual point by equality in the Cauchy–Schwarz inequality, and the minimum-norm characterization of A†bA^\dagger bA†b, all in terms of explicit Euclidean norms on Fin k → ℝ.

Difficulty

The paper's proof rests on strong duality for (15) ("both primal and dual problems are strictly feasible"), which it cites from the SOCP literature rather than proving; Mathlib has no second-order cone duality, so this step is the main gap. The degenerate case λ=τ\lambda = \tauλ=τ also needs care: there ∥Ax−b∥=0\|Ax - b\| = 0∥Ax−b∥=0, the residual term is not differentiable at the optimum, and the conclusion changes from a regularized inverse to a pseudoinverse. A statement that only handles the case Ax≠bAx \ne bAx=b, or that assumes the matrix A⊤A+μIA^\top A + \mu IA⊤A+μI invertible without deriving it from μ>0\mu > 0μ>0, misses part of the theorem.

Formalization scope

  • Normalization. The paper states Theorem 3.2 for ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1 ("we take ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1 in what follows", p. 1039) and obtains general ρ\rhoρ by the scaling φ(A,b,ρ)=ρ φ(A/ρ,b/ρ,1)\varphi(A, b, \rho) = \rho\,\varphi(A/\rho, b/\rho, 1)φ(A,b,ρ)=ρφ(A/ρ,b/ρ,1). Only the ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1 statement is formalized.
  • The RLS solution. The perturbation model is not used here: all statements are about optimal points of (15). That the xxx-part of such a point is the RLS solution is Theorem 3.1 (mission I), and it is recalled in prose only.
  • Norms. Vectors are Fin k → ℝ; the Euclidean norm is the explicit eucNorm v = √(∑ vᵢ²) (Mathlib's ‖·‖ on Fin k → ℝ is the sup norm). Stacked vectors [x;1][x;1][x;1] and [u;v][u;v][u;v] are indexed by Fin m ⊕ Unit.
  • Optimality. "Optimal point" means feasible with objective no worse than every feasible point; the minimum and maximum are therefore attained by definition, and milestone 1 guarantees they exist.
  • Pseudoinverse. Mathlib has no matrix pseudoinverse, so A†bA^\dagger bA†b is stated as the minimum-norm solution of Ax=bAx = bAx=b, which is how the proof uses it. The branch "else" is ¬(μ>0)\neg(\mu > 0)¬(μ>0).
  • Inverse. (μI+A⊤A)−1(\mu I + A^\top A)^{-1}(μI+A⊤A)−1 is Mathlib's Matrix.inv; it is used only where μ>0\mu > 0μ>0, where the matrix is positive definite. τ≥1\tau \ge 1τ≥1 at every feasible point, so μ\muμ is well defined without an extra hypothesis.
  • No trivialization. The goal quantifies over optimal points of (15) over the whole feasible set, not over feasible points, and milestone 1 shows the hypothesis is satisfiable for every (A,b)(A, b)(A,b), including n=0n = 0n=0 or m=0m = 0m=0.
  • Weighted norm. For Remark 3.1, ∥r∥Θ\|r\|_\Theta∥r∥Θ​ for the diagonal Θ\ThetaΘ is written as ∑iri2/θi\sqrt{\sum_i r_i^2/\theta_i}∑i​ri2​/θi​​, which equals ∥Θ−1/2r∥\|\Theta^{-1/2}r\|∥Θ−1/2r∥ for positive weights.

Contributions welcome: second-order cone (or general conic) weak and strong duality for finite-dimensional programs, the equality case of Cauchy–Schwarz in the explicit-norm form used here, and a Moore–Penrose pseudoinverse for real matrices with its minimum-norm property. The platform's ConvexOptimization.conic_slater_strong_duality may help with the duality step.

Selected references

  • L. El Ghaoui and H. Lebret, Robust Solutions to Least-Squares Problems with Uncertain Data, SIAM J. Matrix Anal. Appl. 18(4):1035–1064, 1997. https://doi.org/10.1137/S0895479896298130
  • S. Chandrasekaran, G. H. Golub, M. Gu and A. H. Sayed, A new linear least-squares type model for parameter estimation in the presence of data uncertainties, cited as submitted to SIAM J. Matrix Anal. Appl. (reference [5] of the paper).
  • A. N. Tikhonov and V. Y. Arsenin, Solutions of Ill-Posed Problems, Wiley, New York, 1977 (reference [43] of the paper).
  • Y. Nesterov and A. Nemirovskii, Interior-Point Polynomial Algorithms in Convex Programming, SIAM, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970791
  • M. S. Lobo, L. Vandenberghe, S. Boyd and H. Lebret, Applications of Second-Order Cone Programming, Linear Algebra Appl. 284:193–228, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0024-3795(98)10032-0
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsGraph TheoryOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Theoretical Improvements in Algorithmic Efficiency for Network Flow Problems 1: The Augmentation Bound for Shortest Augmenting PathsResearch Paper

Why the number of augmentations matters

The maximum flow problem asks how much of a commodity can be sent from a source to a sink through a network whose arcs have capacities. It is a basic model in operations research, underlies bipartite matching, transportation and scheduling problems, and is a standard subroutine inside larger combinatorial algorithms.

The classical method for it is the labeling method of Ford and Fulkerson: starting from some flow, repeatedly find an augmenting path from source to sink along which flow can be increased, push as much as the path allows, and stop when no such path exists. When all capacities are integers, each augmentation raises the flow value by at least one, so the method terminates, but the number of augmentations can be as large as the final flow value, which is exponential in the size of the input. Edmonds and Karp give a four-node example in which the method alternates between two paths and needs 2M2M2M augmentations for capacities MMM (Edmonds–Karp 1972, p. 250). With irrational capacities, Ford and Fulkerson showed that the method need not terminate at all and may converge to a non-maximum flow.

Timeline.

  • 1956 — Ford and Fulkerson introduce the labeling method and the max-flow min-cut theorem (Ford–Fulkerson 1956).
  • 1962 — Flows in Networks records the non-termination example for incommensurable capacities.
  • 1970 — Dinic independently obtains a polynomial bound using layered (shortest-path) networks (Dinic 1970).
  • 1972 — Edmonds and Karp prove that choosing each augmenting path with fewest arcs bounds the number of augmentations by 14(n3−n)\tfrac14(n^3-n)41​(n3−n), for arbitrary real capacities (Edmonds–Karp 1972, Theorem 1).

Setting

A network NNN consists of a finite set of nnn nodes, a source sss and a sink t≠st \ne st=s, and a set of arcs, which are ordered pairs (u,v)(u,v)(u,v) with u≠vu \ne vu=v; there is at most one arc from a node to another. One arc is the special return arc (t,s)(t,s)(t,s), and AAA denotes the set of all other arcs. Each (u,v)∈A(u,v) \in A(u,v)∈A has a real capacity c(u,v)>0c(u,v) > 0c(u,v)>0.

A flow is a nonnegative function fff on the arcs of NNN with f(u,v)≤c(u,v)f(u,v) \le c(u,v)f(u,v)≤c(u,v) on AAA and with inflow equal to outflow at every node, the return arc included. The value f(t,s)f(t,s)f(t,s) is the amount sent from sss to ttt; a maximum flow maximizes it.

Given a flow fff, the residual network NfN^fNf has the same nodes, and (u,v)(u,v)(u,v) is an arc of NfN^fNf when (u,v)∈A(u,v) \in A(u,v)∈A with c(u,v)−f(u,v)>0c(u,v) - f(u,v) > 0c(u,v)−f(u,v)>0, or (v,u)∈A(v,u) \in A(v,u)∈A with f(v,u)>0f(v,u) > 0f(v,u)>0. An augmenting path is a sequence of distinct nodes s=u1,…,up=ts = u_1, \dots, u_p = ts=u1​,…,up​=t whose consecutive pairs are arcs of NfN^fNf. Each step carries a number εi>0\varepsilon_i > 0εi​>0 (residual capacity forward, flow backward, or their sum when both (ui,ui+1)(u_i,u_{i+1})(ui​,ui+1​) and (ui+1,ui)(u_{i+1},u_i)(ui+1​,ui​) lie in AAA); ε=min⁡iεi\varepsilon = \min_i \varepsilon_iε=mini​εi​, and a step with εi=ε\varepsilon_i = \varepsilonεi​=ε is a bottleneck arc. Augmenting raises f(t,s)f(t,s)f(t,s) by ε\varepsilonε and shifts the flow on the path's arcs accordingly, using the paper's own rule for opposite arcs, which never exceeds a capacity.

A run with fewest-arc augmentations is a sequence f0,…,fKf^0, \dots, f^Kf0,…,fK where f0f^0f0 is a flow and each fk+1f^{k+1}fk+1 arises from fkf^kfk by augmenting along a path PkP^kPk with fewest arcs. The distance δk(u,v)\delta^k(u,v)δk(u,v) is the least number of arcs of a directed path from uuu to vvv in Nk=NfkN^k = N^{f^k}Nk=Nfk, or ∞\infty∞.

Formalization targets

Goal — Theorem 1

For every network on nnn nodes and every run of length KKK with fewest-arc augmentations,

K≤14 (n3−n),K \le \tfrac14\,(n^3 - n),K≤41​(n3−n),

and if no augmenting path exists relative to fKf^KfK, then fKf^KfK is a maximum flow. The capacities are arbitrary positive reals, and the initial flow is arbitrary.

Milestones

  1. §1.1: augmentation yields a flow with value f(t,s)+εf(t,s) + \varepsilonf(t,s)+ε, ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0.
  2. §1.1: a flow is maximum if and only if it admits no augmenting path.
  3. Proposition 1: a bottleneck arc of PkP^kPk is not an arc of Nk+1N^{k+1}Nk+1.
  4. Proposition 2: (u,v)∈Nk+1(u,v) \in N^{k+1}(u,v)∈Nk+1 implies (u,v)∈Nk(u,v) \in N^k(u,v)∈Nk or (v,u)∈Pk(v,u) \in P^k(v,u)∈Pk.
  5. Lemma 1: if (u,v)(u,v)(u,v) is a bottleneck arc at steps k<mk < mk<m, then (v,u)∈Pl(v,u) \in P^l(v,u)∈Pl for some k<l<mk < l < mk<l<m.
  6. Proposition 3: δk(s,u)≤δk+1(s,u)\delta^k(s,u) \le \delta^{k+1}(s,u)δk(s,u)≤δk+1(s,u) and δk(u,t)≤δk+1(u,t)\delta^k(u,t) \le \delta^{k+1}(u,t)δk(u,t)≤δk+1(u,t).
  7. Lemma 2: if k<lk < lk<l, (u,v)∈Pk(u,v) \in P^k(u,v)∈Pk and (v,u)∈Pl(v,u) \in P^l(v,u)∈Pl, then δl(s,t)≥δk(s,t)+2\delta^l(s,t) \ge \delta^k(s,t) + 2δl(s,t)≥δk(s,t)+2.
  8. Proof of Theorem 1: each pair {u,v}\{u,v\}{u,v} occurs as a bottleneck at most 12(n+1)\tfrac12(n+1)21​(n+1) times.

Significance

The theorem shows that one simple rule for choosing augmenting paths, which a breadth-first labeling process implements, makes the number of augmentations depend on the number of nodes alone, independent of the capacities and of their arithmetic nature. It removes both pathologies of the unrestricted labeling method at once: exponential running time for integer capacities, and non-termination for irrational ones. Together with Dinic's work it is the starting point of the theory of strongly polynomial network-flow algorithms, and the distance-monotonicity argument (Proposition 3, Lemma 2) reappears in blocking-flow and push-relabel analyses.

The result is classical and fully proved in the paper. What this mission adds is a machine-checked version of the complete argument in the paper's own model: return arc, arbitrary real capacities, and the paper's augmentation rule for pairs of opposite arcs, which differs from Ford and Fulkerson's (footnote 1, p. 249). The platform has a max-flow min-cut theorem and an integer termination theorem for the Ford–Fulkerson method in the Bertsimas–Tsitsiklis model (Introduction to Linear Optimization, missions IX–X), but no bound on the number of augmentations. No machine-checked proof of Theorem 1 in Lean is known to exist.

Difficulty

The obvious argument, "each augmentation saturates a bottleneck arc, which then disappears", fails because a saturated arc can reappear after later augmentations push flow back along its reverse. Counting augmentations therefore requires control over how often the same pair of nodes can supply a bottleneck again, and no property of a single augmentation provides it; the bound has to come from an invariant of the whole run that holds for real capacities, where no integrality argument is available. A second trap is that the converse direction of milestone 2 (no augmenting path implies maximality) is a max-flow min-cut statement that the paper cites without proof; it must be proved in the paper's model with the return arc.

Formalization scope

Nodes form a finite type V with decidable equality and nnn = Fintype.card V counts all nodes, sss and ttt included. The arc set A is a Finset (V × V) with no loops and without (t,s)(t,s)(t,s); capacities are real and positive on A. A flow is a function V → V → ℝ whose values off the arcs are ignored. A maximum flow is the predicate "f(t,s)≥g(t,s)f(t,s) \ge g(t,s)f(t,s)≥g(t,s) for every flow ggg", never a real supremum. Paths are lists of distinct nodes with every consecutive pair a residual arc, so the return arc is never on a path. Distances take values in ℕ∞. A run is a pair of ℕ-indexed sequences constrained on indices up to KKK. The explicit constants are stated as printed: 4K≤n3−n4K \le n^3 - n4K≤n3−n in ℕ (the truncated subtraction is harmless since n≤n3n \le n^3n≤n3) and 2 b(u,v)≤n+12\,b(u,v) \le n + 12b(u,v)≤n+1 for the per-pair count.

Case (b) of the paper's definition of augmenting paths is misprinted (its hypothesis repeats that of Case (c)); the formalization uses the reading (ui,ui+1)∉A(u_i,u_{i+1}) \notin A(ui​,ui+1​)∈/A, (ui+1,ui)∈A(u_{i+1},u_i) \in A(ui+1​,ui​)∈A, which the paper's own description of NfN^fNf on p. 251 confirms.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: a run predicate that no sequence satisfies (for instance, one that requires paths through the return arc, or computes ε=0\varepsilon = 0ε=0) would make the bound vacuous; the step predicate here is satisfiable, and a concrete four-node run has been checked. Replacing the paper's augmentation rule by "increase the forward arc by ε\varepsilonε" would also change the theorem, because that rule can violate capacities.

A complete development needs basic facts on simple paths in finite digraphs, shortest paths and their subpaths, and a max-flow min-cut theorem in the paper's model. These are reusable well beyond this mission, as are the network, residual-network and augmentation definitions. Contributions proving any milestone independently are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Edmonds, R. M. Karp, Theoretical Improvements in Algorithmic Efficiency for Network Flow Problems, Journal of the ACM 19(2):248–264, 1972. https://doi.org/10.1145/321694.321699
  • L. R. Ford, D. R. Fulkerson, Maximal Flow Through a Network, Canadian Journal of Mathematics 8:399–404, 1956. https://doi.org/10.4153/CJM-1956-045-5
  • L. R. Ford, D. R. Fulkerson, Flows in Networks, Princeton University Press, 1962. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400875184
  • E. A. Dinic, Algorithm for Solution of a Problem of Maximum Flow in a Network with Power Estimation, Soviet Mathematics Doklady 11:1277–1280, 1970. https://www.cs.bgu.ac.il/~dinitz/D70.pdf
  • D. Bertsimas, J. N. Tsitsiklis, Introduction to Linear Optimization, Athena Scientific, 1997, Chapter 7 (network flow problems; formalized on the platform in missions IX–X).
24 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationFunctional AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Three-Operator Splitting Scheme and its Optimization Applications 2: The Objective Rate of the Weighted Ergodic IterateResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in signal processing, statistics and machine learning minimise a sum of three convex terms: a smooth data-fit term and two nonsmooth regularisers or constraints, each of which is easy to handle on its own (through its proximal map) but not in combination. Examples are constrained sparse regression, matrix completion with a nuclear-norm penalty and box constraints, and support-vector machines with a norm penalty. Davis and Yin (Set-Valued Var. Anal. 25 (2017)) introduced a three-operator splitting scheme that evaluates each proximal map and the gradient of the smooth term once per iteration and reduces to Douglas–Rachford splitting (Lions and Mercier 1979) and forward–backward splitting as special cases. Section 3 of that paper gives the objective-error rates of the scheme on convex problems. This mission formalizes those rates for general convex problems.

Setting

Let HHH be a real Hilbert space. The problem is

min⁡x∈H  f(x)+g(x)+h(x),(3.1)\min_{x \in H}\; f(x) + g(x) + h(x), \tag{3.1}x∈Hmin​f(x)+g(x)+h(x),(3.1)

where f,g:H→(−∞,+∞]f, g : H \to (-\infty, +\infty]f,g:H→(−∞,+∞] are closed, proper, convex functions (lower semicontinuous, never −∞-\infty−∞, finite somewhere, with convex epigraph) and h:H→Rh : H \to \mathbb Rh:H→R is convex and differentiable with β−1\beta^{-1}β−1-Lipschitz gradient ∇h\nabla h∇h, β>0\beta > 0β>0.

For γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0 the proximal map prox⁡γf(x)\operatorname{prox}_{\gamma f}(x)proxγf​(x) is the unique minimiser of y↦f(y)+12γ∥y−x∥2y \mapsto f(y) + \frac{1}{2\gamma}\|y - x\|^2y↦f(y)+2γ1​∥y−x∥2. Algorithm 2 of the paper picks z0∈Hz^0 \in Hz0∈H and γ∈(0,2β)\gamma \in (0, 2\beta)γ∈(0,2β) and iterates, with relaxation λk≡1\lambda_k \equiv 1λk​≡1,

xgk=prox⁡γg(zk),xfk=prox⁡γf(2xgk−zk−γ∇h(xgk)),zk+1=zk+xfk−xgk.x^k_g = \operatorname{prox}_{\gamma g}(z^k),\qquad x^k_f = \operatorname{prox}_{\gamma f}\big(2x^k_g - z^k - \gamma\nabla h(x^k_g)\big),\qquad z^{k+1} = z^k + x^k_f - x^k_g .xgk​=proxγg​(zk),xfk​=proxγf​(2xgk​−zk−γ∇h(xgk​)),zk+1=zk+xfk​−xgk​.

Equivalently zk+1=Tzkz^{k+1} = T z^kzk+1=Tzk for the three-operator map

Tz=prox⁡γf(2prox⁡γg(z)−z−γ∇h(prox⁡γg(z)))+z−prox⁡γg(z).T z = \operatorname{prox}_{\gamma f}\big(2\operatorname{prox}_{\gamma g}(z) - z - \gamma\nabla h(\operatorname{prox}_{\gamma g}(z))\big) + z - \operatorname{prox}_{\gamma g}(z).Tz=proxγf​(2proxγg​(z)−z−γ∇h(proxγg​(z)))+z−proxγg​(z).

If z∗z^*z∗ is a fixed point of TTT, then x∗=prox⁡γg(z∗)x^* = \operatorname{prox}_{\gamma g}(z^*)x∗=proxγg​(z∗) minimises (3.1). The weighted ergodic iterate is

xˉgk=2(k+1)(k+2)∑i=0k(i+1) xgi,\bar x^k_g = \frac{2}{(k+1)(k+2)}\sum_{i=0}^{k} (i+1)\,x^i_g ,xˉgk​=(k+1)(k+2)2​i=0∑k​(i+1)xgi​,

and xˉfk\bar x^k_fxˉfk​ is defined the same way from (xfi)(x^i_f)(xfi​).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2 (p. 840)

Let z∗z^*z∗ be a fixed point of TTT, x∗=prox⁡γg(z∗)x^* = \operatorname{prox}_{\gamma g}(z^*)x∗=proxγg​(z∗), and suppose fff is LLL-Lipschitz continuous on the closed ball B(x∗,(1+γ/β)∥z0−z∗∥)B\big(x^*, (1+\gamma/\beta)\|z^0 - z^*\|\big)B(x∗,(1+γ/β)∥z0−z∗∥). Then there is a constant CCC, independent of kkk, with

(f+g+h)(xˉgk)−(f+g+h)(x∗)≤Ck+1(k≥0).(f+g+h)(\bar x^k_g) - (f+g+h)(x^*) \le \frac{C}{k+1}\qquad (k \ge 0).(f+g+h)(xˉgk​)−(f+g+h)(x∗)≤k+1C​(k≥0).

The goal asserts the order O(1/(k+1))O(1/(k+1))O(1/(k+1)) and leaves the constant free, so it is not invalidated by a sharper constant.

Milestones

  1. Corollary 2.1, Part 1 (p. 834): ∥zj−z∗∥\|z^j - z^*\|∥zj−z∗∥ is nonincreasing.
  2. Lemma 3.1 (p. 838): xfj,xgj∈B(x∗,(1+γ/β)∥z0−z∗∥)x^j_f, x^j_g \in B\big(x^*, (1+\gamma/\beta)\|z^0 - z^*\|\big)xfj​,xgj​∈B(x∗,(1+γ/β)∥z0−z∗∥) for all jjj.
  3. Eq. (3.2) (p. 839): for all k≥0k \ge 0k≥0,
2γ(f(xfk)+g(xgk)+h(xgk)−(f+g+h)(x∗))≤∥zk−x∗∥2−∥zk+1−x∗∥2−∥zk−zk+1∥2+2γ⟨zk−zk+1,∇h(xgk)⟩.2\gamma\big(f(x^k_f) + g(x^k_g) + h(x^k_g) - (f+g+h)(x^*)\big) \le \|z^k - x^*\|^2 - \|z^{k+1} - x^*\|^2 - \|z^k - z^{k+1}\|^2 + 2\gamma\langle z^k - z^{k+1}, \nabla h(x^k_g)\rangle .2γ(f(xfk​)+g(xgk​)+h(xgk​)−(f+g+h)(x∗))≤∥zk−x∗∥2−∥zk+1−x∗∥2−∥zk−zk+1∥2+2γ⟨zk−zk+1,∇h(xgk​)⟩.
  1. Theorem 3.1 (p. 838): the last-iterate rate (f+g+h)(xgk)−(f+g+h)(x∗)=o(1/k+1)(f+g+h)(x^k_g) - (f+g+h)(x^*) = o\big(1/\sqrt{k+1}\big)(f+g+h)(xgk​)−(f+g+h)(x∗)=o(1/k+1​).
  2. Eq. (2.7) (p. 836), with λk≡1\lambda_k \equiv 1λk​≡1: for γ/(2β)<ε<1\gamma/(2\beta) < \varepsilon < 1γ/(2β)<ε<1,
∑i=k∞∥∇h(xgi)−∇h(x∗)∥2≤∥zk−z∗∥2γ(2β−γ/ε).\sum_{i=k}^\infty \|\nabla h(x^i_g) - \nabla h(x^*)\|^2 \le \frac{\|z^k - z^*\|^2}{\gamma(2\beta - \gamma/\varepsilon)} .i=k∑∞​∥∇h(xgi​)−∇h(x∗)∥2≤γ(2β−γ/ε)∥zk−z∗∥2​.
  1. Eq. (3.4) (p. 840): ∥xˉfk−xˉgk∥≤5∥z0−z∗∥/(k+1)\|\bar x^k_f - \bar x^k_g\| \le 5\|z^0 - z^*\|/(k+1)∥xˉfk​−xˉgk​∥≤5∥z0−z∗∥/(k+1).

Significance

The result. Theorem 3.1 gives the last iterate an objective error of o(1/k+1)o(1/\sqrt{k+1})o(1/k+1​). Theorem 3.2 shows that averaging with linearly increasing weights improves this to O(1/(k+1))O(1/(k+1))O(1/(k+1)), the rate of the standard uniform ergodic average, while putting more weight on recent iterates. The paper notes that this matters when the iterates xgkx^k_gxgk​ are sparse vectors or low-rank matrices and the average should stay close to them. The rates hold under a local Lipschitz condition on one of the two nonsmooth terms only, so ggg may be the indicator function of a constraint set. They therefore cover the constrained applications of Section 4 of the paper.

Formalizing it. The results are proved in the paper. No machine-checked version of this scheme or its rates exists on the platform or, as far as is known, in Mathlib. A formalization produces a checked proof in an arbitrary real Hilbert space with extended-valued f,gf, gf,g. It also produces infrastructure that Mathlib lacks: proximal maps characterised by minimisation, the prox-subgradient inclusion, Fejér monotonicity of an averaged-operator iteration, and a weighted Jensen inequality for extended-valued convex functions. All of these can be reused by other splitting and proximal-gradient missions. The formalization also checks the constants: the last display of the published proof of Theorem 3.2 drops a factor 2γ2\gamma2γ in front of the Lipschitz term, and the printed ball in both theorems is centred at 000 where the proof needs x∗x^*x∗.

Difficulty

The obvious argument sums the one-step inequality (3.2). That controls the objective at the two different points xfkx^k_fxfk​ and xgkx^k_gxgk​, and only f(xfk)f(x^k_f)f(xfk​) appears, never f(xgk)f(x^k_g)f(xgk​). Moving from one point to the other needs the Lipschitz hypothesis on fff, and so it needs every iterate, and every weighted average, to stay in the ball on which that hypothesis holds. For the weighted average there is a further obstacle: the cross term 2γ⟨zk−zk+1,∇h(xgk)⟩2\gamma\langle z^k - z^{k+1}, \nabla h(x^k_g)\rangle2γ⟨zk−zk+1,∇h(xgk​)⟩ does not telescope under the weights (i+1)(i+1)(i+1). Controlling it requires the summability of the gradient differences (2.7), which is inherited from the averagedness analysis of Section 2 and not from convexity alone. Uniform averaging with the same argument does not give the weighted statement, and the weights must not be replaced.

Formalization scope

  • HHH is an arbitrary real Hilbert space (InnerProductSpace ℝ H, CompleteSpace H), not Rn\mathbb R^nRn.
  • f,g:H→f, g : H \tof,g:H→ EReal. They are proper (never ⊥\bot⊥, somewhere ≠⊤\ne \top=⊤), lower semicontinuous, and have a convex epigraph in H×RH \times \mathbb RH×R. h:H→Rh : H \to \mathbb Rh:H→R is convex and differentiable, and Mathlib's gradient h is β−1\beta^{-1}β−1-Lipschitz.
  • Proximal maps are not constructed. A map PPP is assumed to minimise f(y)+∥y−x∥2/(2γ)f(y) + \|y - x\|^2/(2\gamma)f(y)+∥y−x∥2/(2γ) for every xxx. Such a map exists and is unique for closed proper convex fff, so nothing is lost.
  • Algorithm 2 is fixed with λk≡1\lambda_k \equiv 1λk​≡1, the only case of Theorems 3.1 and 3.2. Iterates are indexed from 000. The fixed point z∗z^*z∗ is a hypothesis, Tz∗=z∗T z^* = z^*Tz∗=z∗, and x∗:=prox⁡γg(z∗)x^* := \operatorname{prox}_{\gamma g}(z^*)x∗:=proxγg​(z∗). Assumption 1 of the paper follows from this and is not assumed separately.
  • Ball centre. The theorems print B(0,(1+γ/β)∥z0−z∗∥)B(0, (1+\gamma/\beta)\|z^0 - z^*\|)B(0,(1+γ/β)∥z0−z∗∥). The proofs use Lemma 3.1, whose ball is centred at x∗x^*x∗, so the ball here is centred at x∗x^*x∗. "fff is LLL-Lipschitz on the ball" is stated as: fff is finite on the ball, and its real-valued restriction is LLL-Lipschitz there.
  • O(·) and o(·). O(1/(k+1))O(1/(k+1))O(1/(k+1)) is ∃C∈R, ∀k, (f+g+h)(xˉgk)≤(f+g+h)(x∗)+C/(k+1)\exists C \in \mathbb R,\ \forall k,\ (f+g+h)(\bar x^k_g) \le (f+g+h)(x^*) + C/(k+1)∃C∈R, ∀k, (f+g+h)(xˉgk​)≤(f+g+h)(x∗)+C/(k+1), with CCC chosen after all data. o(1/k+1)o(1/\sqrt{k+1})o(1/k+1​) is k+1 ((f+g+h)(xgk)−(f+g+h)(x∗))→0\sqrt{k+1}\,\big((f+g+h)(x^k_g) - (f+g+h)(x^*)\big) \to 0k+1​((f+g+h)(xgk​)−(f+g+h)(x∗))→0, together with finiteness of the objective values as part of the conclusion. No explicit constant from the proof is stated, because the published constant drops a factor.
  • Corollary 2.1 Part 1 and Eq. (2.7) are stated for Algorithm 2 with λk≡1\lambda_k \equiv 1λk​≡1, γ∈(0,2β)\gamma \in (0, 2\beta)γ∈(0,2β) and ε∈(γ/(2β),1)\varepsilon \in (\gamma/(2\beta), 1)ε∈(γ/(2β),1). As printed, Corollary 2.1's condition on τk\tau_kτk​ excludes λk≡1\lambda_k \equiv 1λk​≡1, but Section 3 uses Part 1 in exactly this case. Summability in (2.7) is part of the conclusion.
  • Trivialization ruled out. Objective values are extended reals, and the goal compares them without subtraction. The value (f+g+h)(x∗)(f+g+h)(x^*)(f+g+h)(x∗) is proved finite as part of the conclusion. So the goal cannot hold through ∞−∞\infty - \infty∞−∞ or through an infinite right-hand side.

Welcome contributions: the prox–subgradient inclusion for EReal-valued convex functions, averagedness and Fejér monotonicity of TTT (the companion mission on Section 2 treats the general operator case), a weighted Jensen inequality in EReal, and proofs of the milestones in the listed order.

Selected references

  • D. Davis and W. Yin, A Three-Operator Splitting Scheme and its Optimization Applications, Set-Valued and Variational Analysis 25 (2017) 829–858. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11228-017-0421-z
  • H. H. Bauschke and P. L. Combettes, Convex Analysis and Monotone Operator Theory in Hilbert Spaces, 2nd ed., Springer, 2017. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-48311-5
  • P.-L. Lions and B. Mercier, Splitting Algorithms for the Sum of Two Nonlinear Operators, SIAM J. Numer. Anal. 16 (1979) 964–979. https://doi.org/10.1137/0716071
  • D. Davis and W. Yin, Convergence Rate Analysis of Several Splitting Schemes, in Splitting Methods in Communication, Imaging, Science, and Engineering, Springer, 2016. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-41589-5_4
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationFunctional AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Three-Operator Splitting Scheme and its Optimization Applications 1: Weak and Strong Convergence of the Three-Operator Splitting IterationResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in convex optimization, variational inequalities and signal processing reduce to a monotone inclusion: find a point xxx at which the sum of several monotone operators contains 000. When the sum has two terms, the classical operator-splitting methods (Douglas–Rachford, forward–backward, forward–backward–forward) solve it by iterating a fixed-point map that uses each operator separately, through its resolvent or through a forward (explicit) step. Problems with three terms, for instance a smooth loss plus two nonsmooth regularizers or constraints, are common in practice, and before 2015 no fixed-point map was known that handled three operators one at a time without a product-space reformulation.

Davis and Yin (Set-Valued Var. Anal. 25 (2017) 829–858; preprint arXiv:1504.01032) introduced such a map, now called Davis–Yin three-operator splitting. It contains Douglas–Rachford splitting (C=0C = 0C=0) and forward–backward splitting (B=0B = 0B=0) as special cases, and it has become a standard building block of first-order methods for composite optimization. This mission formalizes Section 2 of the paper: the fixed-point encoding, the averagedness of the map, and the weak and strong convergence of the resulting iteration.

Setting

Let HHH be a real Hilbert space. A set-valued operator A:H→2HA : H \to 2^HA:H→2H is monotone if ⟨x−y,u−v⟩≥0\langle x - y, u - v\rangle \ge 0⟨x−y,u−v⟩≥0 for all u∈Axu \in Axu∈Ax, v∈Ayv \in Ayv∈Ay, and maximal monotone if its graph is not properly contained in the graph of another monotone operator. Its domain is dom⁡(A)={x:Ax≠∅}\operatorname{dom}(A) = \{x : Ax \ne \emptyset\}dom(A)={x:Ax=∅} and the zero set of an operator MMM is zer⁡(M)={x:0∈Mx}\operatorname{zer}(M) = \{x : 0 \in Mx\}zer(M)={x:0∈Mx}. A single-valued C:H→HC : H \to HC:H→H is β\betaβ-cocoercive (β>0\beta > 0β>0) if β∥Cx−Cy∥2≤⟨Cx−Cy,x−y⟩\beta\|Cx - Cy\|^2 \le \langle Cx - Cy, x - y\rangleβ∥Cx−Cy∥2≤⟨Cx−Cy,x−y⟩ for all x,yx, yx,y.

Problem (1.1) is: given maximal monotone A,BA, BA,B and β\betaβ-cocoercive CCC, find

x∈Hwith0∈Ax+Bx+Cx.x \in H \quad\text{with}\quad 0 \in Ax + Bx + Cx .x∈Hwith0∈Ax+Bx+Cx.

For γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0 the resolvent JγA=(I+γA)−1J_{\gamma A} = (I + \gamma A)^{-1}JγA​=(I+γA)−1 is the map with x∈JγAx+γA(JγAx)x \in J_{\gamma A}x + \gamma A(J_{\gamma A}x)x∈JγA​x+γA(JγA​x). The Davis–Yin operator (Eq. (1.2)) is

T:=JγA∘(2JγB−I−γC∘JγB)+I−JγB.T := J_{\gamma A} \circ (2J_{\gamma B} - I - \gamma C \circ J_{\gamma B}) + I - J_{\gamma B}.T:=JγA​∘(2JγB​−I−γC∘JγB​)+I−JγB​.

Algorithm 1 starts from z0∈Hz^0 \in Hz0∈H and, for relaxation parameters λk>0\lambda_k > 0λk​>0, iterates

xBk=JγB(zk),xAk=JγA(2xBk−zk−γCxBk),zk+1=zk+λk(xAk−xBk),x_B^k = J_{\gamma B}(z^k),\qquad x_A^k = J_{\gamma A}(2x_B^k - z^k - \gamma Cx_B^k),\qquad z^{k+1} = z^k + \lambda_k(x_A^k - x_B^k),xBk​=JγB​(zk),xAk​=JγA​(2xBk​−zk−γCxBk​),zk+1=zk+λk​(xAk​−xBk​),

so that zk+1=(1−λk)zk+λkTzkz^{k+1} = (1 - \lambda_k)z^k + \lambda_k Tz^kzk+1=(1−λk​)zk+λk​Tzk. A sequence converges weakly, uk⇀uu_k \rightharpoonup uuk​⇀u, if ⟨uk,y⟩→⟨u,y⟩\langle u_k, y\rangle \to \langle u, y\rangle⟨uk​,y⟩→⟨u,y⟩ for every y∈Hy \in Hy∈H.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.1 (Main convergence theorem)

Fix ε∈(0,1)\varepsilon \in (0,1)ε∈(0,1), γ∈(0,2βε)\gamma \in (0, 2\beta\varepsilon)γ∈(0,2βε), α=1/(2−ε)\alpha = 1/(2-\varepsilon)α=1/(2−ε) and λk∈(0,1/α)\lambda_k \in (0, 1/\alpha)λk​∈(0,1/α) with ∑kτk=∞\sum_k \tau_k = \infty∑k​τk​=∞, where τk=λk(1−λk)+λk(1−α)/α\tau_k = \lambda_k(1-\lambda_k) + \lambda_k(1-\alpha)/\alphaτk​=λk​(1−λk​)+λk​(1−α)/α, and inf⁡kλk>0\inf_k \lambda_k > 0infk​λk​>0. If Fix⁡T≠∅\operatorname{Fix} T \ne \emptysetFixT=∅, there is z∗∈Fix⁡Tz^* \in \operatorname{Fix} Tz∗∈FixT with zk⇀z∗z^k \rightharpoonup z^*zk⇀z∗ and

CxBk→Cx∗  (∀x∗∈zer⁡(A+B+C)),xBk⇀JγB(z∗)∈zer⁡(A+B+C),xAk⇀JγB(z∗),Cx_B^k \to Cx^* \ \ (\forall x^* \in \operatorname{zer}(A+B+C)),\qquad x_B^k \rightharpoonup J_{\gamma B}(z^*) \in \operatorname{zer}(A+B+C),\qquad x_A^k \rightharpoonup J_{\gamma B}(z^*),CxBk​→Cx∗  (∀x∗∈zer(A+B+C)),xBk​⇀JγB​(z∗)∈zer(A+B+C),xAk​⇀JγB​(z∗),

and if AAA or BBB is uniformly monotone on every nonempty bounded subset of its domain, or CCC is demiregular at every zero of A+B+CA + B + CA+B+C, then xBkx_B^kxBk​ and xAkx_A^kxAk​ converge strongly to a common point of zer⁡(A+B+C)\operatorname{zer}(A + B + C)zer(A+B+C).

Milestones

In the order the proof uses them: Lemma 2.1 (the identities for one application of TTT), Lemma 2.2 (zer⁡(A+B+C)=JγB(Fix⁡T)\operatorname{zer}(A+B+C) = J_{\gamma B}(\operatorname{Fix} T)zer(A+B+C)=JγB​(FixT)), Lemma 2.3 (inequality (2.1)), Proposition 2.1 (TTT is 2β/(4β−γ)2\beta/(4\beta-\gamma)2β/(4β−γ)-averaged, inequality (2.2)), Remark 2.1 (the strengthened inequality (2.4)), Corollary 2.1 Parts 1–3 (Fejér monotonicity, vanishing residual, weak convergence of zkz^kzk), Corollary 2.1 Part 4 (the residual rates ∥Tzk−zk∥2≤∥z0−z∗∥2/(τ‾(k+1))\|Tz^k - z^k\|^2 \le \|z^0 - z^*\|^2/(\underline\tau(k+1))∥Tzk−zk∥2≤∥z0−z∗∥2/(τ​(k+1)) and o(1/(k+1))o(1/(k+1))o(1/(k+1))), and Eqs. (2.6)–(2.7) (the per-step descent inequality and its summed form).

Significance

Theorem 2.1 is the basic convergence guarantee for three-operator splitting: it certifies that the computable sequences xBkx_B^kxBk​, xAkx_A^kxAk​, not only the auxiliary sequence zkz^kzk, approach a solution of (1.1). In infinite dimensions this is the delicate part: for Douglas–Rachford splitting (C=0C = 0C=0) weak convergence of the shadow sequence JγB(zk)J_{\gamma B}(z^k)JγB​(zk) was only established by Svaiter in 2011. The result underlies the convergence of the many algorithms obtained from it by specialization (Douglas–Rachford, forward–backward, and the three-block methods of Section 4 of the paper), and the averagedness coefficient of Proposition 2.1 reduces, for B=0B = 0B=0, to the best known one for forward–backward splitting.

All statements of this mission are proved in the paper, partly by appeal to Bauschke and Combettes' monograph (Krasnosel'skiĭ–Mann convergence, the demiclosedness of maximal monotone graphs). None of them has a machine-checked proof: Mathlib has no maximal monotone operators, resolvents, averaged maps or Krasnosel'skiĭ–Mann theorem. The mission therefore produces both a formal proof of the Davis–Yin theorem and a first body of monotone-operator theory in Lean.

Difficulty

The fixed-point part is standard once TTT is known to be averaged: Krasnosel'skiĭ–Mann theory and Opial's argument give zk⇀z∗z^k \rightharpoonup z^*zk⇀z∗. The obstacle is transferring this to xBk=JγB(zk)x_B^k = J_{\gamma B}(z^k)xBk​=JγB​(zk). Resolvents are nonexpansive but not weakly continuous, so zk⇀z∗z^k \rightharpoonup z^*zk⇀z∗ does not imply JγB(zk)⇀JγB(z∗)J_{\gamma B}(z^k) \rightharpoonup J_{\gamma B}(z^*)JγB​(zk)⇀JγB​(z∗); the naive argument fails at exactly this step. Identifying the weak cluster points of xBkx_B^kxBk​ requires a closedness property of sums of maximal monotone operators under mixed weak and strong convergence, fed by the strong convergence of CxBkCx_B^kCxBk​, which in turn needs the extra term of (2.4) that (2.2) discards. Strong convergence in Part 2 needs yet another argument for each of the three alternative hypotheses.

Formalization scope

  • HHH is an arbitrary real Hilbert space (NormedAddCommGroup, InnerProductSpace ℝ, CompleteSpace); a finite-dimensional space would identify weak and strong convergence and change the theorems.
  • Operators A,BA, BA,B are H → Set H; CCC is single-valued H → H. The resolvents are not constructed: JA,JBJ_A, J_BJA​,JB​ are maps satisfying the resolvent inclusion γ−1(x−Jx)∈A(Jx)\gamma^{-1}(x - Jx) \in A(Jx)γ−1(x−Jx)∈A(Jx), which for maximal monotone operators determines them uniquely and exists by Minty's theorem.
  • Weak convergence is ⟨uk,y⟩→⟨u,y⟩\langle u_k, y\rangle \to \langle u, y\rangle⟨uk​,y⟩→⟨u,y⟩ for every yyy; strong convergence is norm convergence. Iterates are indexed from 000.
  • The printed hypothesis α=1/(2−ε)<2β/(4β−γ)\alpha = 1/(2-\varepsilon) < 2\beta/(4\beta-\gamma)α=1/(2−ε)<2β/(4β−γ) of Corollary 2.1 and Theorem 2.1 contradicts γ<2βε\gamma < 2\beta\varepsilonγ<2βε (it is a typo for >>>) and is not assumed. The printed τk=(1−λk/α)λk/α\tau_k = (1-\lambda_k/\alpha)\lambda_k/\alphaτk​=(1−λk​/α)λk​/α is replaced by the τk\tau_kτk​ of the proof (p. 836), a weaker hypothesis.
  • Uniform monotonicity uses a nondecreasing φ:[0,∞)→[0,+∞]\varphi : [0,\infty) \to [0,+\infty]φ:[0,∞)→[0,+∞] with φ(0)=0\varphi(0) = 0φ(0)=0 that vanishes only at 000, as the proof requires; with φ≡0\varphi \equiv 0φ≡0 allowed, Part 2(a) would be false.
  • The O-constant of Corollary 2.1 Part 4 is explicit, ∥z0−z∗∥2/τ‾\|z^0 - z^*\|^2/\underline\tau∥z0−z∗∥2/τ​, and the little-ooo is stated as (k+1)∥Tzk−zk∥2→0(k+1)\|Tz^k - z^k\|^2 \to 0(k+1)∥Tzk−zk∥2→0. Eq. (2.7) is stated with a uniform lower bound λ‾≤λi\underline\lambda \le \lambda_iλ​≤λi​ in place of the printed λk\lambda_kλk​, with summability part of the conclusion.
  • A formalization with TTT an arbitrary averaged map, with resolvents replaced by arbitrary nonexpansive maps, or with the contradictory comparison of α\alphaα kept as a hypothesis would make the theorem vacuous or different; all three are ruled out.

A complete development needs the basic theory of monotone operators (monotonicity of resolvents' graphs, firm nonexpansiveness of resolvents, weak-to-strong closedness of maximal monotone graphs), Krasnosel'skiĭ–Mann iteration with Opial's lemma, and weak sequential compactness of bounded sets in Hilbert space. All of this is reusable far beyond this mission, and contributions of any of these pieces as separate theorems are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. Davis and W. Yin, A Three-Operator Splitting Scheme and its Optimization Applications, Set-Valued and Variational Analysis 25 (2017) 829–858. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11228-017-0421-z
  • H. H. Bauschke and P. L. Combettes, Convex Analysis and Monotone Operator Theory in Hilbert Spaces, Springer, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4419-9467-7
  • B. F. Svaiter, On weak convergence of the Douglas–Rachford method, SIAM J. Control Optim. 49 (2011) 280–287. https://doi.org/10.1137/100788100
  • D. Davis and W. Yin, Convergence rate analysis of several splitting schemes, in: Splitting Methods in Communication, Imaging, Science, and Engineering, Springer, 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1406.4834
14 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Algorithmic Game TheoryConvex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

On Minimizing a Convex Function Subject to Linear Inequalities II: Optimality Conditions for the Sum of the Largest Linear FormsResearch Paper

Motivation

In 1955 E. M. L. Beale showed how Dantzig's simplex method, which was built for linear objectives, can be carried over to certain nonlinear convex objectives that are minimized subject to linear inequalities (Beale 1955). Section 4 of that paper treats one such objective: the sum of the ttt largest of a set of ggg linear forms. Beale's motivation comes from the theory of games: "if the enemy has to choose ttt out of a set of ggg possible actions, and LfL_fLf​ represents his average gain through using the fffth", then the defender wants to minimize the sum of the ttt largest LfL_fLf​.

The same objective can be written as a linear program. One introduces a bound uuu and requires every sum of ttt forms to be at most uuu. That formulation has (gt)\binom{g}{t}(tg​) constraints, which is unwieldy once t>1t>1t>1 and ggg is large. Beale's alternative works with the nonlinear objective directly, and he needs a test that tells him when the current basic solution is already optimal. This mission formalizes that test, Theorem 1 of the paper.

The objective reappears in later work under other names: the sum of the kkk largest components of a vector, the "top-kkk sum", and kkk times the conditional value-at-risk of an empirical distribution. Beale's paper is an early source for its optimality conditions.

Setting

There are real variables zlz_lzl​, indexed by lll in a finite set (possibly empty), and u1,…,usu_1,\dots,u_su1​,…,us​. Two linear forms in these variables are given,

A=A0+∑lAlzl+∑f=1sφfuf,L0=c00+∑lc0lzl+∑f=1sθfuf,A=A_0+\sum_l A_l z_l+\sum_{f=1}^{s}\varphi_f u_f,\qquad L_0=c_{00}+\sum_l c_{0l} z_l+\sum_{f=1}^{s}\theta_f u_f,A=A0​+l∑​Al​zl​+f=1∑s​φf​uf​,L0​=c00​+l∑​c0l​zl​+f=1∑s​θf​uf​,

together with sss further forms

Lf=L0−uf(f=1,…,s).L_f=L_0-u_f\qquad(f=1,\dots,s).Lf​=L0​−uf​(f=1,…,s).

For an integer τ≥0\tau\ge0τ≥0 the objective is

C=A+(sum of the τ largest of L0,L1,…,Ls).C=A+\bigl(\text{sum of the }\tau\text{ largest of }L_0,L_1,\dots,L_s\bigr).C=A+(sum of the τ largest of L0​,L1​,…,Ls​).

The sum of the τ\tauτ largest of s+1s+1s+1 numbers is the largest total of any τ\tauτ of them. Ties do not make it ambiguous.

The feasible region is fixed by a set FFF of indices. The variables zlz_lzl​ with l∈Fl\in Fl∈F and all the ufu_fuf​ are free, and every other zlz_lzl​ is restricted to zl≥0z_l\ge0zl​≥0. At the origin z=0z=0z=0, u=0u=0u=0 all s+1s+1s+1 forms are equal to c00c_{00}c00​, so the origin is where CCC fails to be differentiable. In Beale's algorithm the origin is the current basic solution: the ufu_fuf​ measure how far the "borderline" forms sit from a chosen critical form, and AAA collects the forms that are certainly among the largest.

Write al=Al+τc0la_l=A_l+\tau c_{0l}al​=Al​+τc0l​ and wf=φf+τθfw_f=\varphi_f+\tau\theta_fwf​=φf​+τθf​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (a), p. 179

For τ≤s\tau\le sτ≤s, CCC is minimized over the feasible region when all the zlz_lzl​ and ufu_fuf​ vanish if and only if

al≥0 for all l,al=0 for all l∈F,0≤wf≤1 for all f,τ−1≤∑f=1swf≤τ.(4.5)\begin{aligned} &a_l\ge0\ \text{for all } l, \qquad a_l=0\ \text{for all } l\in F,\\ &0\le w_f\le1\ \text{for all } f,\qquad \tau-1\le\sum_{f=1}^{s}w_f\le\tau . \end{aligned}\tag{4.5}​al​≥0 for all l,al​=0 for all l∈F,0≤wf​≤1 for all f,τ−1≤f=1∑s​wf​≤τ.​(4.5)

"Minimized" means a global minimum: C(0,0)≤C(z,u)C(0,0)\le C(z,u)C(0,0)≤C(z,u) at every feasible point.

Milestones

  1. Convexity (p. 179). CCC is a convex function of (z,u)(z,u)(z,u) for τ≤s+1\tau\le s+1τ≤s+1.
  2. Descent rules (second half of Theorem 1 (a), p. 179). When a condition of (4.5) fails, a stated move of one variable, or of all ufu_fuf​ together, lowers CCC below C(0,0)C(0,0)C(0,0) for every small enough step. There are six moves: zl↑z_l\uparrowzl​↑ if al<0a_l<0al​<0; zl↓z_l\downarrowzl​↓ if al>0a_l>0al​>0 and l∈Fl\in Fl∈F; uf↑u_f\uparrowuf​↑ if wf<0w_f<0wf​<0; uf↓u_f\downarrowuf​↓ if wf>1w_f>1wf​>1; all uf↑u_f\uparrowuf​↑ if ∑wf<τ−1\sum w_f<\tau-1∑wf​<τ−1; all uf↓u_f\downarrowuf​↓ if ∑wf>τ\sum w_f>\tau∑wf​>τ.
  3. The rearrangement identity (proof of Theorem 1 (a), p. 180). If 1≤τ≤s1\le\tau\le s1≤τ≤s, u1′≤⋯≤us′u'_1\le\dots\le u'_su1′​≤⋯≤us′​ and uτ′≤0u'_\tau\le0uτ′​≤0, then
C=A0+τc00+∑lalzl′+∑f=1τ(wf−1)(uf′−uτ′)+∑f=τ+1swf(uf′−uτ′)+{∑f=1swf−τ}uτ′.C=A_0+\tau c_{00}+\sum_l a_l z'_l+\sum_{f=1}^{\tau}(w_f-1)(u'_f-u'_\tau)+\sum_{f=\tau+1}^{s}w_f(u'_f-u'_\tau)+\Bigl\{\sum_{f=1}^{s}w_f-\tau\Bigr\}u'_\tau .C=A0​+τc00​+l∑​al​zl′​+f=1∑τ​(wf​−1)(uf′​−uτ′​)+f=τ+1∑s​wf​(uf′​−uτ′​)+{f=1∑s​wf​−τ}uτ′​.
  1. Theorem 1 (b) (p. 180). For τ=s+1\tau=s+1τ=s+1, the origin is a minimum if and only if (4.5) holds and wf=1w_f=1wf​=1 for every fff. Otherwise some value of ufu_fuf​ with the sign opposite to wf−1w_f-1wf​−1 lowers CCC.

Significance

Theorem 1 is the optimality test of Beale's simplex method for the sum-of-largest objective. The algorithm on pp. 178–179 changes nonbasic variables one at a time. When no single change is profitable it applies Theorem 1: either (4.5) holds and the current solution is optimal, or one of the six descent rules names the variable to change next. The test is exact even though the objective is not differentiable at the current point. It is a closed-form description of the subdifferential of a top-τ\tauτ sum at a point where all the forms tie. The theorem is also the base case of the multi-group generalization that Beale mentions on p. 181.

The paper proves Theorem 1 by hand. To our knowledge neither the theorem nor the rearrangement identity behind it has been formalized in any proof assistant. The mission produces:

  • a checked statement and proof of the test, including the degenerate cases τ=0\tau=0τ=0 and s=0s=0s=0, which the paper does not discuss separately;
  • the boundary case τ=s+1\tau=s+1τ=s+1;
  • a reusable Lean definition of the sum of the τ\tauτ largest entries of a finite real family, with its convexity.

Difficulty

Necessity, the "only if" direction, is the part the paper calls obvious: each descent rule changes CCC linearly for small steps. Two features still have to be handled explicitly. The step must be small only in rule-dependent ways, and the ordering of the forms changes along the moves of rules 4 and 6.

Sufficiency is where the work lies. The naive argument, "the directional derivative in every coordinate direction is non-negative, so the origin is a minimum", fails because CCC is not differentiable at the origin. Nonnegative derivatives along the coordinate axes do not control mixed directions in which several ufu_fuf​ move by different amounts, which reorders the forms. Which τ\tauτ forms are the largest then depends on the point, and the paper settles the configurations in which L0L_0L0​ is among the τ\tauτ largest by an informal appeal to the "essential symmetry" between L0L_0L0​ and the other forms. A formal proof cannot leave that appeal informal: the forms are parametrised relative to L0L_0L0​ (each LfL_fLf​ is L0−ufL_0-u_fL0​−uf​), so the symmetry is a change of variables that has to be written down and shown to preserve (4.5).

Formalization scope

  • Data. The variables are z : Fin r → ℝ (any r, including 000) and u : Fin s → ℝ. The paper's ufu_fuf​ for f=1,…,sf=1,\dots,sf=1,…,s is Lean's u f for f=0,…,s−1f=0,\dots,s-1f=0,…,s−1. The coefficients (A0,Al,φf,c00,c0l,θf)(A_0,A_l,\varphi_f,c_{00},c_{0l},\theta_f)(A0​,Al​,φf​,c00​,c0l​,θf​) form a structure Forms r s.
  • Forms. The family L0,…,LsL_0,\dots,L_sL0​,…,Ls​ is Fin (s+1) → ℝ, with index 000 for L0L_0L0​ and index f.succ for L0−ufL_0-u_fL0​−uf​. The free set FFF is a Finset (Fin r), and τ\tauτ is a natural number cast to R\mathbb RR wherever it multiplies a coefficient.
  • Sum of the largest. sumLargest τ v is the maximum over τ\tauτ-element subsets SSS of ∑i∈Svi\sum_{i\in S}v_i∑i∈S​vi​ (Finset.sup' over powersetCard). It is the junk 000 for τ\tauτ larger than the number of entries, a case no statement uses.
  • Minimality. "Minimized when all variables vanish" is the global statement C(0,0)≤C(z,u)C(0,0)\le C(z,u)C(0,0)≤C(z,u) for all (z,u)(z,u)(z,u) with zl≥0z_l\ge0zl​≥0 for l∉Fl\notin Fl∈/F. It is not a local minimum, and the sign constraints on restricted zlz_lzl​ are kept: they are why the first condition of (4.5) is an inequality.
  • Descent. "CCC can be decreased by moving xxx from zero" is a strict decrease for all step sizes in some interval (0,ε)(0,\varepsilon)(0,ε), with every other variable at zero.
  • No trivialization. The goal is an equivalence with no hypothesis beyond τ≤s\tau\le sτ≤s. Neither direction can be satisfied vacuously, and the cases τ=0\tau=0τ=0 and s=0s=0s=0 are included, as on the page.
  • Added hypotheses. The rearrangement milestone assumes τ≥1\tau\ge1τ≥1, because the paper's uτ′u'_\tauuτ′​ does not exist at τ=0\tau=0τ=0. Its second line uses c0lc_{0l}c0l​ where the page misprints clc_lcl​.

Needed infrastructure:

  • basic lemmas on sumLargest: its value at a constant family, at a family sorted by a monotone shift, and under adding a common constant;
  • the change of variables behind the paper's symmetry between L0L_0L0​ and the other forms.

These lemmas are reusable for any top-kkk-sum or empirical-CVaR objective. Contributions are welcome at any level: lemmas about sumLargest, any of the milestones, or an alternative sufficiency proof through convexity and one-sided directional derivatives.

Not in scope: the pivoting rules (4.2)–(4.4), the degeneracy discussion on pp. 180–181, and the multi-group generalization, which the paper says is "cumbersome to state" and does not state.

Selected references

  • E. M. L. Beale, On Minimizing a Convex Function Subject to Linear Inequalities, Journal of the Royal Statistical Society, Series B 17(2), 173–184, 1955. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.2517-6161.1955.tb00191.x
  • G. B. Dantzig, A. Orden and P. Wolfe, The generalized simplex method for minimizing a linear form under linear inequality restraints, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 5(2), 183–195, 1955. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1955.5.183
  • R. T. Rockafellar and S. Uryasev, Optimization of conditional value-at-risk, Journal of Risk 2(3), 21–41, 2000. https://doi.org/10.21314/JOR.2000.038
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Partial Differential EquationsProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Revenue Management of a Make-to-Stock Queue: Exponential Stationary Density under Normal Reflection (Proposition 2)Research Paper

Motivation

A make-to-stock manufacturer who also sells on a spot market must decide, at every moment, whether to keep producing and whether to accept or reject incoming orders at the prevailing price. Caldentey and Wein (Revenue Management of a Make-to-Stock Queue, Operations Research 54(5), 2006) study this problem in heavy traffic. The limit is a two-dimensional singular control problem for a diffusion: the inventory level and the logarithm of the price move jointly as a correlated Brownian motion, and the controls push the inventory only when it reaches one of two free boundaries. The optimal boundaries are characterized by an elliptic free-boundary problem that the authors could not solve in closed form.

The paper's way forward is an approximation: change the direction of reflection on the boundary so that the stationary distribution of the controlled process becomes an explicit exponential. Proposition 2 states that exponential form, and it turns the free-boundary problem into a calculus-of-variations problem for the two boundary curves. Explicit stationary densities of reflected diffusions in two dimensions are rare; the classical condition for an exponential stationary density of a reflected Brownian motion, and the characterization of the stationary law by a basic adjoint relation, are due to Harrison and Williams, Multidimensional reflected Brownian motions having exponential stationary distributions, Annals of Probability 15, 1987, the reference the paper cites. This mission formalizes the analytic core of Proposition 2: the exponential density satisfies that relation for the reflection field the proposition singles out.

Setting

Points of the plane are (x,y)(x,y)(x,y), with xxx the inventory level and yyy the logarithm of the price. The limiting process (X,Y)(\mathcal X,\mathcal Y)(X,Y) has drift (θ,0)(\theta,0)(θ,0) and covariance matrix

Σ=(σ2σδϱσδϱδ2),σ>0, δ>0, −1<ϱ<1,\Sigma=\begin{pmatrix}\sigma^2&\sigma\delta\varrho\\ \sigma\delta\varrho&\delta^2\end{pmatrix},\qquad \sigma>0,\ \delta>0,\ -1<\varrho<1,Σ=(σ2σδϱ​σδϱδ2​),σ>0, δ>0, −1<ϱ<1,

so its generator is

Γ=θ∂∂x+σ22∂2∂x2+σδϱ∂2∂x ∂y+δ22∂2∂y2.\Gamma=\theta\frac{\partial}{\partial x}+\frac{\sigma^2}{2}\frac{\partial^2}{\partial x^2}+\sigma\delta\varrho\frac{\partial^2}{\partial x\,\partial y}+\frac{\delta^2}{2}\frac{\partial^2}{\partial y^2}.Γ=θ∂x∂​+2σ2​∂x2∂2​+σδϱ∂x∂y∂2​+2δ2​∂y2∂2​.

Two curves bound the region where the process lives: the rejection boundary x=η(y)x=\eta(y)x=η(y) (below it, orders are rejected) and the idleness boundary x=ξ(y)x=\xi(y)x=ξ(y) (above it, production stops). For ymin⁡<ymax⁡y_{\min}<y_{\max}ymin​<ymax​ the region is

Ω={(x,y): ymin⁡<y<ymax⁡, η(y)<x<ξ(y)},\Omega=\{(x,y):\ y_{\min}<y<y_{\max},\ \eta(y)<x<\xi(y)\},Ω={(x,y): ymin​<y<ymax​, η(y)<x<ξ(y)},

and its boundary splits into four pieces: x=η(y)x=\eta(y)x=η(y), x=ξ(y)x=\xi(y)x=ξ(y), y=ymin⁡y=y_{\min}y=ymin​, y=ymax⁡y=y_{\max}y=ymax​. Write n⃗\vec nn for the inward unit normal on ∂Ω\partial\Omega∂Ω and dldldl for arc length. A reflection field v⃗\vec vv on ∂Ω\partial\Omega∂Ω gives the direction in which the process is pushed back into Ω\OmegaΩ. The basic adjoint relation (BAR) of the paper, equation (43), is

∫ΩΓf πΩ ds+12∫∂Ωv⃗⋅∇f πΩ dl=0for all test functions f,\int_\Omega \Gamma f\,\pi_\Omega\,ds+\frac12\int_{\partial\Omega}\vec v\cdot\nabla f\,\pi_\Omega\,dl=0\quad\text{for all test functions } f,∫Ω​ΓfπΩ​ds+21​∫∂Ω​v⋅∇fπΩ​dl=0for all test functions f,

and the paper cites Harrison and Williams for the fact that the stationary distribution πΩ\pi_\OmegaπΩ​ of the reflected process satisfies it. Proposition 2 introduces the eigen-decomposition Σ=V′EV\Sigma=V'EVΣ=V′EV (VVV a rotation whose rows are eigenvectors, EEE diagonal), the whitening map T=E−1/2VT=E^{-1/2}VT=E−1/2V and Ω∗=T(Ω)\Omega^*=T(\Omega)Ω∗=T(Ω), and assumes that Tv⃗T\vec vTv is normal to ∂Ω∗\partial\Omega^*∂Ω∗. The exponents are

mx=2θσ2(1−ϱ2),my=−2ϱθσδ(1−ϱ2).(47)m_x=\frac{2\theta}{\sigma^2(1-\varrho^2)},\qquad m_y=\frac{-2\varrho\theta}{\sigma\delta(1-\varrho^2)}.\tag{47}mx​=σ2(1−ϱ2)2θ​,my​=σδ(1−ϱ2)−2ϱθ​.(47)

Formalization targets

Goal: the exponential density satisfies the BAR under conormal reflection

For η,ξ\eta,\xiη,ξ continuously differentiable with η<ξ\eta<\xiη<ξ on [ymin⁡,ymax⁡][y_{\min},y_{\max}][ymin​,ymax​], π(x,y)=emxx+myy\pi(x,y)=e^{m_xx+m_yy}π(x,y)=emx​x+my​y, and every C2C^2C2 function fff on R2\mathbb R^2R2,

∫ΩΓf  π ds+12∫∂Ω(Σn⃗)⋅∇f  π dl=0.\int_\Omega \Gamma f\;\pi\,ds+\frac12\int_{\partial\Omega}(\Sigma\vec n)\cdot\nabla f\;\pi\,dl=0 .∫Ω​Γfπds+21​∫∂Ω​(Σn)⋅∇fπdl=0.

The boundary integral is written out on the four pieces, with n⃗ dl\vec n\,dlndl equal to (1,−η′(y)) dy(1,-\eta'(y))\,dy(1,−η′(y))dy, (−1,ξ′(y)) dy(-1,\xi'(y))\,dy(−1,ξ′(y))dy, (0,1) dx(0,1)\,dx(0,1)dx and (0,−1) dx(0,-1)\,dx(0,−1)dx respectively. The normalizing constant is left out because the relation is linear in π\piπ.

Milestones

  1. The interior equation: Γ∗π=−θπx+σ22πxx+σδϱ πxy+δ22πyy=0\Gamma^*\pi=-\theta\pi_x+\frac{\sigma^2}{2}\pi_{xx}+\sigma\delta\varrho\,\pi_{xy}+\frac{\delta^2}{2}\pi_{yy}=0Γ∗π=−θπx​+2σ2​πxx​+σδϱπxy​+2δ2​πyy​=0 everywhere.
  2. The zero-flux identity: 12Σ∇π=(θ,0) π\frac12\Sigma\nabla\pi=(\theta,0)\,\pi21​Σ∇π=(θ,0)π everywhere.
  3. The meaning of the hypothesis: with T=E−1/2VT=E^{-1/2}VT=E−1/2V, (Tv)⋅(Tw)=v⋅Σ−1w(Tv)\cdot(Tw)=v\cdot\Sigma^{-1}w(Tv)⋅(Tw)=v⋅Σ−1w, and for n≠0n\neq0n=0, TvTvTv is orthogonal to TTT of every vector orthogonal to nnn exactly when vvv is a multiple of Σn\Sigma nΣn.
  4. The normalizing constant: π\piπ is integrable on Ω\OmegaΩ and a unique KΩ>0K_\Omega>0KΩ​>0 makes KΩπK_\Omega\piKΩ​π integrate to one.

Significance

For the operations model, Proposition 2 is what makes the problem computable. Once the stationary density is explicit, the long-run average cost of any pair of boundary curves is an explicit integral, and optimizing over (η,ξ)(\eta,\xi)(η,ξ) becomes a variational problem with Euler–Lagrange equations; the paper's proposed policy and its numerical comparisons all rest on it.

For formalization, the mission produces a machine-checked version of a statement whose proof the paper does not contain (it is in an online companion) and whose hypothesis is stated only in words. The formal statements fix exactly which reflection field makes the claim true, which the prose leaves ambiguous. None of the statements has, to our knowledge, a machine-checked proof anywhere; the result itself is classical in spirit (an integration by parts on a planar region), but no divergence theorem on a region between two graphs with an anisotropic operator is currently available as a ready-made statement.

Difficulty

The interior equation and the zero-flux identity are finite computations with the exponential. The difficulty is the goal: it is an integration-by-parts identity on a curved planar region with an anisotropic second-order operator. The obvious first step, "apply Green's identity", presupposes a divergence theorem on a region bounded by two graphs x=η(y)x=\eta(y)x=η(y), x=ξ(y)x=\xi(y)x=ξ(y) and two horizontal segments, with the boundary integral written in the parametrization of each piece and the orientation of every normal tracked. Mathlib has the divergence theorem on rectangular boxes, not on such regions, and the moving limits η(y)\eta(y)η(y), ξ(y)\xi(y)ξ(y) are exactly where the terms in η′\eta'η′ and ξ′\xi'ξ′ of the boundary integral come from.

The second trap is the reflection field. The page describes the modification as substituting the inward unit normal n⃗\vec nn for v⃗\vec vv; with v⃗=n⃗\vec v=\vec nv=n the identity is false as soon as Σ\SigmaΣ is not a multiple of the identity (on a random instance the residual is of order one). Only the conormal field Σn⃗\Sigma\vec nΣn, which is what the hypothesis of Proposition 2 selects, gives a true statement.

Formalization scope

Everything lives in the namespace MakeToStockRM.ExpDensity. The plane is ℝ × ℝ with the inventory first; partial derivatives are Fréchet derivatives applied to (1, 0) and (0, 1), and the mixed partial is ∂x(∂yf)\partial_x(\partial_y f)∂x​(∂y​f). Parameters satisfy σ>0\sigma>0σ>0, δ>0\delta>0δ>0, ∣ϱ∣<1|\varrho|<1∣ϱ∣<1; θ\thetaθ is any real number, and θ=0\theta=0θ=0 (then π≡1\pi\equiv1π≡1) is allowed.

This is the analytic, pinned-down content of Proposition 2. The identification "the BAR characterizes the stationary law of the reflected diffusion" (Harrison–Williams 1987) is out of scope: Mathlib has no reflected Brownian motion. Relative to the page, the formalization commits to the following:

  • The reflection field is v⃗=Σn⃗\vec v=\Sigma\vec nv=Σn with n⃗\vec nn the inward unit normal and dldldl arc length. The hypothesis "Tv⃗T\vec vTv is normal to ∂Ω∗\partial\Omega^*∂Ω∗" fixes only the direction of v⃗\vec vv (milestone 3); the length Σn⃗\Sigma\vec nΣn is the one for which the BAR holds. The page's phrase "substituting the inward unit normal n⃗\vec nn for v⃗\vec vv" is inconsistent with the proposition's own hypothesis and is not followed.
  • The boundary curves are C1C^1C1 on R\mathbb RR with η<ξ\eta<\xiη<ξ on [ymin⁡,ymax⁡][y_{\min},y_{\max}][ymin​,ymax​], and ymin⁡<ymax⁡y_{\min}<y_{\max}ymin​<ymax​, so Ω\OmegaΩ is a nonempty bounded region; the paper assumes this implicitly.
  • Test functions are all C2C^2C2 functions on R2\mathbb R^2R2, which are bounded with bounded derivatives on the closure of Ω\OmegaΩ (the paper's "twice continuous and bounded").
  • The constant KΩK_\OmegaKΩ​ is dropped from the goal and treated in milestone 4.

The goal quantifies over every C2C^2C2 test function; restricting to functions supported inside Ω\OmegaΩ would delete the boundary term and reduce the goal to milestone 1, and that trivialization is ruled out. The second half of Proposition 2 ("(45)–(46) is equivalent to (48)–(49)"), Proposition 1, the heavy-traffic limit, the HJB equation and the proposed policy are not formalized: their normalizations or proofs are only in the online companion.

A complete development needs a divergence theorem on regions between two C1C^1C1 graphs, which is reusable for any planar PDE statement on such regions. Contributions of that lemma, and of the four milestones, are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. Caldentey, L. M. Wein, Revenue Management of a Make-to-Stock Queue, Operations Research 54(5):859–875, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1060.0289
  • J. M. Harrison, R. J. Williams, Multidimensional reflected Brownian motions having exponential stationary distributions, Annals of Probability 15(1):115–137, 1987. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176992259
  • F. John, Partial Differential Equations, 4th ed., Springer, 1982. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4684-9333-7
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
OptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Pricing of Seasonal Products in the Presence of Forward-Looking Consumers 3: Optimal Contingent-Pricing Revenue with Myopic Customers and Exponential ValuationsResearch Paper

Motivation

Retailers of seasonal goods (fashion, electronics, holiday items) sell a fixed stock over a short season and routinely cut prices toward its end. A markdown of this kind segments the market over time: customers with high valuations buy early at a premium price, and customers with lower valuations are served later at a discount price. Aviv and Pazgal (MSOM 2008) study how much such two-price schemes are worth when customers arrive over time, differ in their valuations, and may or may not anticipate the discount.

To measure the value of price segmentation, the paper compares every two-price scheme with the best fixed-price policy, a single price held for the whole season. Its benchmark is the case of myopic customers, who never delay a purchase strategically. Proposition 3 of the paper computes this benchmark in closed form in the simplest nontrivial setting: exponentially distributed valuations that do not decline over the season, and unlimited inventory. The resulting formula explains the pattern of the paper's Table 1, where the benefit of segmentation grows with the heterogeneity of valuations and with a late discount time.

Setting

A seller offers a product during the season [0,H][0, H][0,H]; throughout this mission H=1H = 1H=1, so time is measured as a fraction of the season. Customers arrive as a Poisson process with rate λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0. Customer jjj has a base valuation VjV_jVj​ drawn independently from a distribution FFF with tail Fˉ(x)=1−F(x)\bar F(x) = 1 - F(x)Fˉ(x)=1−F(x), and values the product at Vje−αtV_j e^{-\alpha t}Vj​e−αt at time ttt, where α≥0\alpha \ge 0α≥0 is the decline factor. The paper reparametrizes it as ρ=e−αH\rho = e^{-\alpha H}ρ=e−αH, the fraction of the base valuation left at the end of the season.

In the numerical study, FFF is a Gamma law with mean μ\muμ and coefficient of variation ccc (standard deviation over mean): shape 1/c21/c^21/c2 and rate 1/(μc2)1/(\mu c^2)1/(μc2). The paper sets μ=1\mu = 1μ=1. For c=1c = 1c=1 this is the exponential law with mean one, Fˉ(x)=e−x\bar F(x) = e^{-x}Fˉ(x)=e−x for x≥0x \ge 0x≥0.

A contingent two-price policy posts the premium price p1p_1p1​ on [0,T)[0, T)[0,T), where 0<T≤10 < T \le 10<T≤1 is fixed, and a discount price p2≤p1p_2 \le p_1p2​≤p1​ from time TTT on. A myopic customer arriving at t<Tt < Tt<T buys at p1p_1p1​ if his valuation is at least p1p_1p1​; otherwise he waits and buys at TTT if his valuation is then at least p2p_2p2​. Customers arriving at or after TTT buy if their valuation is at least p2p_2p2​. The numbers of customers in these groups are Poisson with means

ΛI(p1)=λ∫0TFˉ(p1eαt) dt,ΛW(p1,p2)=λ∫0T[Fˉ(min⁡{p1eαt,p2eαT})−Fˉ(p1eαt)]dt,ΛL(p2)=λ∫THFˉ(p2eαt) dt.\Lambda_I(p_1) = \lambda\int_0^T \bar F(p_1 e^{\alpha t})\,dt, \quad \Lambda_W(p_1,p_2) = \lambda\int_0^T \big[\bar F(\min\{p_1e^{\alpha t}, p_2e^{\alpha T}\}) - \bar F(p_1e^{\alpha t})\big]dt, \quad \Lambda_L(p_2) = \lambda\int_T^H \bar F(p_2e^{\alpha t})\,dt .ΛI​(p1​)=λ∫0T​Fˉ(p1​eαt)dt,ΛW​(p1​,p2​)=λ∫0T​[Fˉ(min{p1​eαt,p2​eαT})−Fˉ(p1​eαt)]dt,ΛL​(p2​)=λ∫TH​Fˉ(p2​eαt)dt.

With unlimited inventory, the expected revenue of the policy is

RC/N(p1,p2)=p1ΛI(p1)+p2(ΛW(p1,p2)+ΛL(p2)),R_{C/N}(p_1, p_2) = p_1\Lambda_I(p_1) + p_2\big(\Lambda_W(p_1,p_2) + \Lambda_L(p_2)\big),RC/N​(p1​,p2​)=p1​ΛI​(p1​)+p2​(ΛW​(p1​,p2​)+ΛL​(p2​)),

and the expected revenue of a single price ppp is RF(p)=p λ∫0HFˉ(peαt) dtR_F(p) = p\,\lambda\int_0^H \bar F(p e^{\alpha t})\,dtRF​(p)=pλ∫0H​Fˉ(peαt)dt (Eq. (9) of the paper). The optimal values are πC/N∗=max⁡p2≤p1RC/N(p1,p2)\pi^*_{C/N} = \max_{p_2 \le p_1} R_{C/N}(p_1,p_2)πC/N∗​=maxp2​≤p1​​RC/N​(p1​,p2​) and πF∗=max⁡pRF(p)\pi^*_F = \max_p R_F(p)πF∗​=maxp​RF​(p).

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 3

Suppose c=1c = 1c=1, ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1 and Q/λ→∞Q/\lambda \to \inftyQ/λ→∞ (unlimited inventory), with μ=1\mu = 1μ=1 and H=1H = 1H=1. Then

πC/N∗=(λe−1)⋅eT/e=πF∗⋅eT/e.\pi^*_{C/N} = (\lambda e^{-1})\cdot e^{T/e} = \pi^*_F \cdot e^{T/e}.πC/N∗​=(λe−1)⋅eT/e=πF∗​⋅eT/e.

Both maxima are attained. The goal states the two optimal values; it does not fix the optimal prices.

Milestones from the paper's proof

  1. The reduced problem: for 0≤p2≤p10 \le p_2 \le p_10≤p2​≤p1​, RC/N(p1,p2)=p2⋅λe−p2+(p1−p2)⋅λTe−p1R_{C/N}(p_1,p_2) = p_2\cdot\lambda e^{-p_2} + (p_1-p_2)\cdot\lambda T e^{-p_1}RC/N​(p1​,p2​)=p2​⋅λe−p2​+(p1​−p2​)⋅λTe−p1​.
  2. Its solution: over p2≤p1p_2 \le p_1p2​≤p1​ the maximum is λe−1+T/e\lambda e^{-1+T/e}λe−1+T/e, attained exactly at p1∗=2−T/e≥1p_1^* = 2 - T/e \ge 1p1∗​=2−T/e≥1, p2∗=p1∗−1≤1p_2^* = p_1^* - 1 \le 1p2∗​=p1∗​−1≤1.
  3. The fixed-price optimum (a supporting item of the goal, stated in the proof on pp. 358–359): p∗=μ=1p^* = \mu = 1p∗=μ=1 is the unique optimal single price and πF∗=λe−1\pi^*_F = \lambda e^{-1}πF∗​=λe−1.

Significance

Proposition 3 gives the relative benefit of contingent pricing over a single price, eT/e−1e^{T/e} - 1eT/e−1, as a function of the discount time alone. It increases in TTT and is largest at T=1T = 1T=1, where it equals e1/e−1≈44.46%e^{1/e} - 1 \approx 44.46\%e1/e−1≈44.46%. This is the paper's analytic anchor for its numerical findings: segmentation is most valuable when valuations are heterogeneous and customers are carried to the discount at little cost, and a late discount exposes more customers to the premium price. Under strategic customers the same quantity serves as an upper bound on the benefit of segmentation (§6.1 of the paper).

The result is proved in the paper, in a short appendix argument that states the reduced problem and its solution without the calculus. No machine-checked version exists. Formalizing it produces a reusable Lean encoding of the paper's segment rates ΛI,ΛW,ΛL\Lambda_I, \Lambda_W, \Lambda_LΛI​,ΛW​,ΛL​ as integrals of a valuation tail, a Gamma valuation law through Mathlib's gammaMeasure, and a complete verification that the integral model reduces to the two-variable problem and that the stated prices are its unique maximizer.

Difficulty

The obvious route is to write the revenue in closed form and set the gradient to zero. Two steps of that route are not automatic. First, the reduction requires evaluating the three integrals with the piecewise tail of the exponential law, including the min⁡\minmin inside ΛW\Lambda_WΛW​, and the reduced formula is valid only for nonnegative prices; negative prices must be handled separately in the model itself, where the tail equals one. Second, the reduced objective p2λe−p2+(p1−p2)λTe−p1p_2\lambda e^{-p_2} + (p_1-p_2)\lambda T e^{-p_1}p2​λe−p2​+(p1​−p2​)λTe−p1​ is not concave on the region p2≤p1p_2 \le p_1p2​≤p1​, so a stationary point is not automatically a global maximizer, and the boundary p2=p1p_2 = p_1p2​=p1​ and unbounded directions have to be ruled out. Uniqueness of the maximizer, which the paper asserts, fails at T=0T = 0T=0 and needs T>0T > 0T>0.

Formalization scope

All declarations sit in the namespace SeasonalPricing.MyopicExp. Time, prices and rates are real numbers. The season is [0,1][0, 1][0,1] with 0<T≤10 < T \le 10<T≤1 and λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0. Integrals are interval integrals. The valuation tail is gammaValuationTail μ c x = 1 - cdf (gammaMeasure (1/c^2) (1/(μ c^2))) x, used at μ=c=1\mu = c = 1μ=c=1. The hypothesis ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1 is decayRatio α 1 = 1 with α≥0\alpha \ge 0α≥0.

Readings of the paper's informal words:

  • "Q/λ→∞Q/\lambda \to \inftyQ/λ→∞" is read as unlimited inventory: the truncated Poisson mean N(q,Λ)N(q,\Lambda)N(q,Λ) of §4.2 is replaced by Λ\LambdaΛ and stock-outs never occur. This is what the proof computes, what p. 348 writes as Q=∞Q = \inftyQ=∞, and what §7.1 calls inventory that is "practically unlimited". A limit of finite-inventory optimal revenues is not stated.
  • "max" is an attained maximum (IsGreatest), not a supremum.
  • The optimum is taken over all real prices with p2≤p1p_2 \le p_1p2​≤p1​, as printed; the paper never restricts signs, and negative prices are never optimal in the model.
  • The seller's discount at TTT is a best response to p1p_1p1​ in the paper (R(q∣p1)R(q \mid p_1)R(q∣p1​), p. 349). With unlimited inventory it does not depend on the realized sales, and the nested maximum equals the joint maximum over (p1,p2)(p_1, p_2)(p1​,p2​), which is what the goal states.
  • "The solution … is" (milestone 2) and "the optimal single price is given by p∗=μ=1p^* = \mu = 1p∗=μ=1" (the fixed-price item) are read as unique maximizers.

The Gamma density printed on p. 349 has the exponent 1/(sc2−1)1/(sc^2-1)1/(sc2−1), a misprint for 1/c2−11/c^2 - 11/c2−1; at c=1c = 1c=1 the exponent is 000 either way.

A trivializing formalization would state the goal on the reduced two-variable function, dropping the model: the goal here is about RC/NR_{C/N}RC/N​ built from ΛI,ΛW,ΛL\Lambda_I, \Lambda_W, \Lambda_LΛI​,ΛW​,ΛL​ and the Gamma tail, and about RFR_FRF​ built from Eq. (9). The platform's BuyingToBundle.monopolyRevenue (definition monopoly_pricing) is a related object, sup⁡pp ν([p,∞))\sup_p p\,\nu([p,\infty))supp​pν([p,∞)); with ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1 and H=1H = 1H=1, πF∗\pi^*_FπF∗​ equals λ\lambdaλ times it for the exponential law, but it is a supremum without arrivals or time and is not reused.

Contributions welcome: closed forms of the segment rates for the exponential tail, a general lemma that negative prices are dominated, and the two-variable maximization.

Selected references

  • Y. Aviv and A. Pazgal, Optimal Pricing of Seasonal Products in the Presence of Forward-Looking Consumers, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 10(3):339–359, 2008. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.1070.0183
  • D. Besanko and W. L. Winston, Optimal Price Skimming by a Monopolist Facing Rational Consumers, Management Science 36(5):555–567, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.36.5.555
  • G. Gallego and G. van Ryzin, Optimal Dynamic Pricing of Inventories with Stochastic Demand over Finite Horizons, Management Science 40(8):999–1020, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.40.8.999
6 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Pricing of Seasonal Products in the Presence of Forward-Looking Consumers 1: Threshold Purchasing Policies under Contingent PricingResearch Paper

Motivation

Retailers of fashion and seasonal goods sell at a premium price early in the season and mark the remaining stock down later. When customers anticipate the markdown, some of them who would buy at the premium price instead wait, trading a lower price against the risk that the item sells out and against the decline of their own valuation over the season. How forward-looking ("strategic") customers respond to a markdown policy is the first question any model of such pricing has to answer, because the seller's optimal prices depend on it.

Aviv and Pazgal (MSOM 2008) model a seller with a fixed inventory, Poisson arrivals of customers with heterogeneous, exponentially declining valuations, and two pricing regimes: contingent pricing, where the discount depends on the inventory left at the markdown time, and announced fixed discounts. The first step of their analysis of contingent pricing is Theorem 1: whatever the other customers do, a customer's best response is a threshold rule on his current valuation, with a threshold that rises as the markdown approaches. Their numerical study of equilibria and of the value of price commitment (§§4.2–7) is built on this reduction.

Setting

A seller holds QQQ units over a season [0,H][0, H][0,H] split at a fixed time TTT with 0<T≤H0 < T \le H0<T≤H. On [0,T)[0, T)[0,T) the premium price p1p_1p1​ applies. At time TTT the seller observes the remaining inventory QT∈{0,1,…,Q}Q_T \in \{0, 1, \dots, Q\}QT​∈{0,1,…,Q} and charges the discount menu price p2(QT)p_2(Q_T)p2​(QT​), where p2(q)≤p1p_2(q) \le p_1p2​(q)≤p1​ for q=1,…,Qq = 1, \dots, Qq=1,…,Q. Customer jjj has a base valuation VjV_jVj​ and valuation Vj(t)=Vje−αtV_j(t) = V_j e^{-\alpha t}Vj​(t)=Vj​e−αt at time ttt, with a common decline factor α≥0\alpha \ge 0α≥0.

A customer arriving at t<Tt < Tt<T either buys immediately at p1p_1p1​ or waits until TTT, when he requests a unit if the discounted price leaves him a nonnegative surplus. Waiting is uncertain in two ways: the remaining inventory QTQ_TQT​ is random, and when fewer units remain than customers request them, units are rationed at random. A belief is a probability mass function π\piπ of QTQ_TQT​ on {0,…,Q}\{0, \dots, Q\}{0,…,Q} together with allocation probabilities a(q)=Pr⁡{A∣QT=q}∈[0,1]a(q) = \Pr\{\mathcal A \mid Q_T = q\} \in [0,1]a(q)=Pr{A∣QT​=q}∈[0,1], a(0)=0a(0) = 0a(0)=0, where A\mathcal AA is the event that the customer is allocated a unit. It is determined by the other customers' strategies, which are arbitrary.

With δ=e−α(T−t)\delta = e^{-\alpha(T-t)}δ=e−α(T−t), the expected surplus of waiting of a customer with current valuation ψ\psiψ is

Wt(ψ)=EQT ⁣[max⁡{ψδ−p2(QT),0}⋅1{A∣QT}]=∑q=0Qπ(q) a(q) max⁡{ψδ−p2(q),0}.W_t(\psi) = \mathrm E_{Q_T}\!\left[\max\{\psi\delta - p_2(Q_T), 0\}\cdot \mathbf 1\{\mathcal A \mid Q_T\}\right] = \sum_{q=0}^{Q}\pi(q)\,a(q)\,\max\{\psi\delta - p_2(q), 0\}.Wt​(ψ)=EQT​​[max{ψδ−p2​(QT​),0}⋅1{A∣QT​}]=q=0∑Q​π(q)a(q)max{ψδ−p2​(q),0}.

The paper's purchase rule (p. 344): buy immediately iff the current surplus V(t)−p1V(t) - p_1V(t)−p1​ is nonnegative and at least Wt(V(t))W_t(V(t))Wt​(V(t)).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 and Corollary 1

Assume p1≥0p_1 \ge 0p1​≥0, and α>0\alpha > 0α>0 or ∑qπ(q)a(q)<1\sum_q \pi(q)a(q) < 1∑q​π(q)a(q)<1. For every t∈[0,T)t \in [0,T)t∈[0,T) the equation

ψ−p1=Wt(ψ)(2)\psi - p_1 = W_t(\psi) \tag{2}ψ−p1​=Wt​(ψ)(2)

has a unique solution ψ(t)≥p1\psi(t) \ge p_1ψ(t)≥p1​; a customer arriving at ttt buys immediately under the purchase rule if and only if V(t)≥ψ(t)V(t) \ge \psi(t)V(t)≥ψ(t); and the threshold function ψ:[0,T)→[p1,∞)\psi : [0, T) \to [p_1, \infty)ψ:[0,T)→[p1​,∞) is nondecreasing in ttt.

Milestones

  1. The right-hand side of (2) is nonnegative and nondecreasing in ψ\psiψ, with increments bracketed by δ Pr⁡{ψδ≥p2(QT),A}\delta\,\Pr\{\psi\delta \ge p_2(Q_T), \mathcal A\}δPr{ψδ≥p2​(QT​),A} at the two endpoints, and this slope is below one.
  2. Equation (2) has a unique solution ψ≥p1\psi \ge p_1ψ≥p1​.

Significance

Theorem 1 reduces a customer's strategy, a function of arrival time and valuation, to one threshold function ψ\psiψ on [0,T)[0, T)[0,T). The segment sizes ΛI,ΛS,ΛW,ΛL\Lambda_I, \Lambda_S, \Lambda_W, \Lambda_LΛI​,ΛS​,ΛW​,ΛL​ of §4.2, the seller's menu problem (3), the equilibrium iteration (4) and the closed form of Proposition 2 are all written in terms of ψ\psiψ; without Theorem 1 none of them is defined. Corollary 1, that the threshold rises toward the markdown, is what the paper calls "useful in our analyses below"; the customer segments of Figure 1 are drawn with it.

The result is proved in the paper, with a short appendix argument. No machine-checked version exists. The mission produces a formal statement and proof of the reduction for an arbitrary belief, which fixes the exact hypotheses under which it holds: the paper's slope bound needs either valuation decline (α>0\alpha > 0α>0) or imperfect availability, and the monotonicity of the threshold needs a nonnegative premium price. A formal WtW_tWt​ and threshold are the starting point for formalizing the equilibrium and pricing results of the paper.

Difficulty

The mathematics is one-dimensional. The difficulty is in stating it exactly. WtW_tWt​ is piecewise linear with a kink wherever ψδ\psi\deltaψδ crosses a menu price, so the paper's derivative is only a one-sided derivative, and the uniqueness argument has to use increments. The paper's bound "slope <1< 1<1" is false when α=0\alpha = 0α=0 and a unit is allocated with certainty; then (2) has either no finite solution or a half-line of them. The threshold's monotonicity in ttt rests on Wt(ψ)W_t(\psi)Wt​(ψ) increasing in ttt for fixed ψ\psiψ, which needs ψ≥0\psi \ge 0ψ≥0; with a negative premium price the threshold can decrease. The naive reading of "optimal to use a threshold" as an abstract fixed-point fact about any monotone function with slope below one discards the model and is not the goal.

Formalization scope

Lean namespace SeasonalPricing.Contingent. Time, prices and valuations are real numbers. The belief is a pair pmf alloc : ℕ → ℝ restricted to {0, …, Q} (IsInventoryBelief), not a random variable on a probability space; only the law of (QT,1{A})(Q_T, \mathbf 1\{\mathcal A\})(QT​,1{A}) enters (2). The menu is p2 : ℕ → ℝ with p2(q)≤p1p_2(q) \le p_1p2​(q)≤p1​ required on {1,…,Q}\{1, \dots, Q\}{1,…,Q} only; p2(0)p_2(0)p2​(0) never matters because a(0)=0a(0) = 0a(0)=0. The belief does not depend on the arrival time, as in Eq. (4) of the paper. waitingSurplus is WtW_tWt​ with e−α(T−t)e^{-\alpha(T-t)}e−α(T−t) written Real.exp (-(α * (T - t))); buysNow is the purchase rule, stated on the current valuation V(t)V(t)V(t).

Readings of the paper's words:

  • "the unique solution" of (2): existence and uniqueness of a real ψ≥p1\psi \ge p_1ψ≥p1​ (∃!). The paper's "ψ∈[p1,∞]\psi \in [p_1, \infty]ψ∈[p1​,∞]" includes ∞\infty∞ only in the case excluded by the added hypothesis.
  • "it is optimal to base purchasing decisions on a threshold function": the purchase rule of p. 344 holds exactly when V(t)≥ψ(t)V(t) \ge \psi(t)V(t)≥ψ(t).
  • "derivative … <1< 1<1": a two-sided bracket on increments of WtW_tWt​, with right slope δPr⁡{ψδ≥p2(QT),A}\delta\Pr\{\psi\delta \ge p_2(Q_T), \mathcal A\}δPr{ψδ≥p2​(QT​),A}, below one.
  • "increasing" (Corollary 1): nondecreasing (MonotoneOn), since ψ\psiψ is constant on an initial interval whenever no menu price is reachable (p. 347).

Added hypotheses, both named in the statements: α>0\alpha > 0α>0 or ∑qπ(q)a(q)<1\sum_q \pi(q)a(q) < 1∑q​π(q)a(q)<1, the one hypothesis the paper's proof uses without stating it; and p1≥0p_1 \ge 0p1​≥0, the model's convention that prices are nonnegative. Only the branch 0≤t<T0 \le t < T0≤t<T of the threshold θ\thetaθ is stated: for t≥Tt \ge Tt≥T the paper's θ(t)=p2\theta(t) = p_2θ(t)=p2​ is the model's rule for late customers. The belief enters through the explicit sum; a formalization with an unspecified monotone WWW, or with ψ(t)\psi(t)ψ(t) defined by choice inside a definition, is not the target.

No new library is needed beyond finite sums, max and Real.exp. A lemma on unique roots of ψ↦ψ−c−f(ψ)\psi \mapsto \psi - c - f(\psi)ψ↦ψ−c−f(ψ) for fff with increments bounded by k(ψ′−ψ)k(\psi' - \psi)k(ψ′−ψ), k<1k < 1k<1, is reusable. Proofs of the milestones and the goal, in any order, are welcome.

Selected references

  • Y. Aviv and A. Pazgal, Optimal Pricing of Seasonal Products in the Presence of Forward-Looking Consumers, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 10(3):339–359, 2008. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.1070.0183
  • X. Su, Intertemporal Pricing with Strategic Customer Behavior, Management Science 53(5):726–741, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.1060.0667
  • G. Gallego and G. van Ryzin, Optimal Dynamic Pricing of Inventories with Stochastic Demand over Finite Horizons, Management Science 40(8):999–1020, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.40.8.999
5 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Dynamic ProgrammingProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

The Theory of Dynamic Programming: The Index Rule for Bellman's Stochastic Gold-Mining ProblemResearch Paper

Motivation

Richard Bellman's survey The theory of dynamic programming (Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 60 (1954), 503–515, DOI 10.1090/s0002-9904-1954-09848-8) introduced dynamic programming to a general mathematical audience. It states the principle of optimality (§2, p. 504): "An optimal policy has the property that whatever the initial state and initial decisions are, the remaining decisions must constitute an optimal policy with regard to the state resulting from the first decisions", and derives from it the functional equations of finite and infinite stochastic decision processes, (4.2) and (5.1) (p. 506).

The survey illustrates the method on a small number of worked examples. The second of them, §8 "Stochastic gold mining" (pp. 508–509), is the one with a sharp answer: a two-armed sequential allocation problem with an absorbing failure state, whose optimal policy is a simple index rule. It is an early instance of the allocation-index phenomenon later made general by Gittins and Jones (1974) and Gittins (1979), and the paper itself notes (p. 509) that the rule "is not valid generally in more complicated decision processes", citing a counterexample of Karlin and Shapiro. The full treatment is in Bellman's RAND report R-245 and his 1957 book Dynamic Programming.

Setting

Two gold mines, Anaconda (AAA) and Bonanza (BBB), hold amounts x≥0x \ge 0x≥0 and y≥0y \ge 0y≥0 of gold. A single machine can be used in either mine. A use in Anaconda succeeds with probability ppp: it then mines a fraction rrr of the gold currently in Anaconda and the machine stays undamaged. With probability 1−p1-p1−p it mines nothing and the machine is destroyed. Bonanza behaves the same way with probability qqq and fraction sss. While the machine works, the operator chooses the next mine; the aim is to maximize the expected amount mined before the machine is destroyed.

The only information the operator ever receives is that the machine still works. A policy is therefore a choice sequence σ=(σ0,σ1,… )∈{A,B}N\sigma = (\sigma_0, \sigma_1, \dots) \in \{A, B\}^{\mathbb N}σ=(σ0​,σ1​,…)∈{A,B}N: the mine for use number nnn, applied if uses 0,…,n−10, \dots, n-10,…,n−1 succeeded. With ana_nan​, bnb_nbn​ the numbers of AAA- and BBB-uses among the first nnn, use nnn collects gn=rx(1−r)ang_n = r x (1-r)^{a_n}gn​=rx(1−r)an​ if σn=A\sigma_n = Aσn​=A and gn=sy(1−s)bng_n = s y (1-s)^{b_n}gn​=sy(1−s)bn​ if σn=B\sigma_n = Bσn​=B, and does so with probability ∏k=0nπσk\prod_{k=0}^{n} \pi_{\sigma_k}∏k=0n​πσk​​ (πA=p\pi_A = pπA​=p, πB=q\pi_B = qπB​=q). The expected return is

J(σ;x,y)=∑n≥0(∏k=0nπσk)gn,J(\sigma; x, y) = \sum_{n \ge 0} \Big(\prod_{k=0}^{n} \pi_{\sigma_k}\Big) g_n ,J(σ;x,y)=n≥0∑​(k=0∏n​πσk​​)gn​,

and Bellman's (8.1) defines the optimal return

f(x,y)=sup⁡σJ(σ;x,y).f(x, y) = \sup_\sigma J(\sigma; x, y).f(x,y)=σsup​J(σ;x,y).

In Lean these are expectedReturn p q r s σ x y and optimalReturn p q r s x y in the namespace BellmanTheoryDP.GoldMining.

Formalization targets

Milestone: the functional equation (8.2), p. 508

f(x,y)=max⁡{p [rx+f((1−r)x,y)], q [sy+f(x,(1−s)y)]}.f(x, y) = \max\Big\{ p\,[r x + f((1-r)x, y)],\ q\,[s y + f(x, (1-s)y)] \Big\}.f(x,y)=max{p[rx+f((1−r)x,y)], q[sy+f(x,(1−s)y)]}.

Goal: the decision rule (8.3), p. 509, corrected

Write VA=p[rx+f((1−r)x,y)]V_A = p[rx + f((1-r)x, y)]VA​=p[rx+f((1−r)x,y)] and VB=q[sy+f(x,(1−s)y)]V_B = q[sy + f(x, (1-s)y)]VB​=q[sy+f(x,(1−s)y)] for the two branches of (8.2). For 0<p,q,r,s<10 < p, q, r, s < 10<p,q,r,s<1 and x,y≥0x, y \ge 0x,y≥0:

prx1−p>qsy1−q⇒VA>VB,prx1−p<qsy1−q⇒VA<VB,prx1−p=qsy1−q⇒VA=VB.\frac{prx}{1-p} > \frac{qsy}{1-q} \Rightarrow V_A > V_B, \qquad \frac{prx}{1-p} < \frac{qsy}{1-q} \Rightarrow V_A < V_B, \qquad \frac{prx}{1-p} = \frac{qsy}{1-q} \Rightarrow V_A = V_B .1−pprx​>1−qqsy​⇒VA​>VB​,1−pprx​<1−qqsy​⇒VA​<VB​,1−pprx​=1−qqsy​⇒VA​=VB​.

The paper prints the rule with (1−r)(1-r)(1−r) and (1−s)(1-s)(1−s) in the denominators:

a. For prx/(1−r)>qsy/(1−s)prx/(1 - r) > qsy/(1 - s)prx/(1−r)>qsy/(1−s), choose A, b. For prx/(1−r)<qsy/(1−s)prx/(1 - r) < qsy/(1 - s)prx/(1−r)<qsy/(1−s), choose B, c. For prx/(1−r)=qsy/(1−s)prx/(1 - r) = qsy/(1 - s)prx/(1−r)=qsy/(1−s), choose either.

and glosses it as "the locus of points where immediate expected gain over immediate expected loss is the same for both choices". The immediate expected loss is the probability of destroying the machine, 1−p1-p1−p (resp. 1−q1-q1−q), not 1−r1 - r1−r. As printed the rule is false: with p=1/2p = 1/2p=1/2, r=0.9r = 0.9r=0.9, q=0.9q = 0.9q=0.9, s=0.1s = 0.1s=0.1, x=1x = 1x=1, y=2y = 2y=2 the printed indices are 4.5>0.24.5 > 0.24.5>0.2, but VA≈0.924<VB≈1.055V_A \approx 0.924 < V_B \approx 1.055VA​≈0.924<VB​≈1.055. The mission's goal is the corrected rule, the one the paper describes in words.

Companion: the index policy is optimal, p. 509

"Using this prescription, f(x,y)f(x, y)f(x,y) may be computed recurrently": the choice sequence σ∗\sigma^*σ∗ generated by applying the corrected rule to the current amounts at every use satisfies J(σ∗;x,y)=f(x,y)J(\sigma^*; x, y) = f(x, y)J(σ∗;x,y)=f(x,y).

Significance

The decision rule reduces an optimization over infinite sequences to comparing two explicit numbers, one per mine, each depending only on that mine's own data. This is the defining property of an index policy, and gold mining is one of the earliest problems where it was observed. The functional equation (8.2) is the concrete form, for this process, of the infinite-horizon equation (5.1) that the paper states formally.

Formalizing the example yields a complete machine-checked instance of the principle of optimality for an infinite-horizon stochastic process whose state space (the amounts left in the two mines) is infinite, where the supremum over policies is not attained trivially and the finite-horizon recursion does not apply directly. It also records, with a checked statement, the correction of the misprint in (8.3). No machine-checked proof of (8.2) or (8.3) is known to exist.

Difficulty

The equation (8.2) looks immediate, and the paper calls it "easily seen". The informal argument treats fff as the value of an optimal policy, but fff is a supremum over infinite sequences that need not be attained a priori, and the return of a sequence is an infinite series. The finite-horizon recursion (4.2) does not apply as it stands, because the process has no last stage and its state space, the amounts left in the two mines, is infinite.

The rule (8.3) compares the two optimal continuations f((1−r)x,y)f((1-r)x, y)f((1−r)x,y) and f(x,(1−s)y)f(x, (1-s)y)f(x,(1−s)y), which are themselves unknown. A comparison of the one-step gains alone does not decide it, as the misprinted rule shows. Parts a and b are strict preferences, so it is not enough to show that one choice is at least as good as the other.

Formalization scope

  • Representation. The mines are a two-element inductive type Mine; a policy is a function ℕ → Mine (ChoiceSeq). All quantities are real numbers. Randomized policies are mixtures of choice sequences and give no larger return, so they are not modelled. No restriction to stationary or Markov policies is made: fff is the supremum over all sequences.
  • Parameter ranges. The paper does not state them. The theorems assume 0<p,q,r,s<10 < p, q, r, s < 10<p,q,r,s<1 and x,y≥0x, y \ge 0x,y≥0 (zero amounts allowed). p,q<1p, q < 1p,q<1 keeps the indices prx/(1−p)prx/(1-p)prx/(1−p), qsy/(1−q)qsy/(1-q)qsy/(1−q) well defined.
  • Series and supremum. JJJ is a real tsum and fff a real iSup. For the parameter ranges above the terms are nonnegative, the partial sums are bounded by x+yx + yx+y, and the family is bounded above, so neither Lean default value (0 for a divergent series or an unbounded supremum) arises; this is stated as the auxiliary theorem expectedReturn_le_add.
  • Survival indexing. The gold of use nnn is counted only if use nnn itself succeeds, so the survival product runs over k≤nk \le nk≤n.
  • The misprint. The goal and the index policy use (1−p)(1-p)(1−p), (1−q)(1-q)(1−q) in place of the printed (1−r)(1-r)(1−r), (1−s)(1-s)(1−s). The printed rule appears only as the quotation above.
  • No trivializing encoding. fff is defined as the supremum of expected returns over all choice sequences, per (8.1); it is not defined as a solution of (8.2), as the value of the index policy, or as a limit of value iteration, any of which would make the milestone or the goal true by definition.
  • Auxiliary theorems (not from the paper). The bound 0≤J≤x+y0 \le J \le x + y0≤J≤x+y with summability, the one-step unrolling J(σ)=p[rx+J(σ′;(1−r)x,y)]J(\sigma) = p[rx + J(\sigma'; (1-r)x, y)]J(σ)=p[rx+J(σ′;(1−r)x,y)] when σ0=A\sigma_0 = Aσ0​=A (and symmetrically), and the single-mine values f(x,0)=prx/(1−p(1−r))f(x, 0) = prx/(1 - p(1-r))f(x,0)=prx/(1−p(1−r)), f(0,y)=qsy/(1−q(1−s))f(0, y) = qsy/(1-q(1-s))f(0,y)=qsy/(1−q(1−s)) are included as footholds. They are not milestones.
  • Related platform content. AllocationIndices.two_discount_index_policy_optimal (Gittins et al., Theorem 3.4) concerns Markov bandits whose rewards are discounted by ata^tat at global time ttt; gold mining multiplies by the success probability of each use of the mine used, so it is a different model and is not reused. BertsekasDP.dp_algorithm_optimality is finite-horizon and does not give (8.2).

Contributions welcome: proofs of the auxiliary theorems, of (8.2), of the decision rule, and of the optimality of the index policy.

Selected references

  • R. Bellman, The theory of dynamic programming, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 60 (1954), no. 6, 503–515. https://doi.org/10.1090/s0002-9904-1954-09848-8
  • R. Bellman, Dynamic Programming, Princeton University Press, 1957.
  • J. C. Gittins, Bandit processes and dynamic allocation indices, J. Roy. Statist. Soc. Ser. B 41 (1979), 148–177. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.2517-6161.1979.tb01068.x
  • J. C. Gittins, K. D. Glazebrook, R. Weber, Multi-armed Bandit Allocation Indices, 2nd ed., Wiley, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1002/9780470980033
4 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Algorithmic Game TheoryMechanism Design·Captain: mikedeng1

School Choice: A Mechanism Design Approach 2: The Top Trading Cycles Mechanism with Type-Specific Quotas Is Strategy-ProofResearch Paper

Motivation

Many US school districts assign children to public schools centrally. Each family ranks the schools. Each school ranks the children by priority, which is set by state or local law (siblings, walking distance, a lottery). A procedure then turns these rankings into an assignment. Abdulkadiroğlu and Sönmez (Columbia Economics Discussion Paper 0203-18, 2003; published in the American Economic Review 93(3), 2003) cast this as a mechanism design problem. They showed that the mechanisms then in use in Boston, Columbus and Minneapolis gave families reasons to misreport their preferences. They proposed two alternatives: the student-optimal stable mechanism of Gale and Shapley, and a school-choice version of Shapley and Scarf's top trading cycles (TTC) mechanism.

Many districts also operate under controlled choice: court-ordered or voluntary rules that keep the racial or ethnic composition of each school within bounds. In Minneapolis, for instance, a 100-seat school could admit at most 75 majority and at most 55 minority students (paper, Section III). Such rules are implemented as type-specific quotas. Section III.B of the paper modifies TTC to respect these quotas. It proves that the modified mechanism keeps both properties that recommend TTC: it wastes nothing beyond what the quotas force (constrained efficiency, Proposition 6), and truth-telling is a dominant strategy (strategy-proofness, Proposition 7). This mission formalizes those two results.

Setting

There is a finite set III of students and a finite set SSS of schools. School sss has a capacity qsq_sqs​, and the total number of seats suffices: ∣I∣≤∑sqs|I|\le\sum_s q_s∣I∣≤∑s​qs​. Each student iii has a strict preference over all schools, encoded as a ranking Pi:S→{0,…,∣S∣−1}P_i : S\to\{0,\dots,|S|-1\}Pi​:S→{0,…,∣S∣−1} with rank 000 the favourite. Each school sss has a strict priority ranking over all students, with rank 000 the highest priority. Each student belongs to exactly one type τ(i)\tau(i)τ(i), and school sss has a type quota qstq_s^tqst​ for each type ttt.

An assignment ν\nuν gives each student a school or nothing (∅\varnothing∅, worse than every school). It satisfies the controlled choice constraints if every school sss receives at most qsq_sqs​ students, and at most qstq_s^tqst​ students of each type ttt. An assignment μ\muμ is constrained efficient if no assignment satisfying the constraints makes every student weakly better off and some student strictly better off.

The top trading cycles mechanism with type-specific quotas, TTCq\mathrm{TTC}^qTTCq, runs in steps. Each school keeps a counter csc_scs​ (initially qsq_sqs​) and one type counter cstc_s^tcst​ for each type (initially qstq_s^tqst​). A school is removed when csc_scs​ reaches zero. At each step:

  • every remaining student points to her favourite remaining school with room for her type, that is, with cs>0c_s>0cs​>0 and csτ(i)>0c_s^{\tau(i)}>0csτ(i)​>0;
  • every remaining school points to its highest-priority remaining student, whatever her type;
  • every student on a cycle of this graph is assigned the school she points to and leaves;
  • that school's counter and its counter for her type each drop by one.

A direct mechanism is strategy-proof if no student can ever gain by misreporting her preference, whatever the others report.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 7 (p. 23)

For every student iii, every profile PPP of announced preferences and every alternative report QiQ_iQi​,

TTCq(Qi,P−i)(i)=s′  ⟹  TTCq(P)(i)=s with Pi(s)≤Pi(s′).\mathrm{TTC}^q(Q_i,P_{-i})(i)=s' \implies \mathrm{TTC}^q(P)(i)=s \text{ with } P_i(s)\le P_i(s').TTCq(Qi​,P−i​)(i)=s′⟹TTCq(P)(i)=s with Pi​(s)≤Pi​(s′).

This holds for all capacities without shortage, all quotas, all types and all priorities. The priorities are fixed data, not reported.

Milestones

  1. Section III.B, Step 1 (p. 22). At every step there is at least one cycle, after the convention below has removed the students who cannot point.
  2. The Lemma (Appendix, pp. 28–29; declared valid for the modified mechanism on p. 30). Fix the other students' reports, and suppose student iii is still present at the beginning of a step under two different reports of hers. Then the two runs have the same remaining students and the same counters at that point.
  3. Proposition 6 (p. 23). TTCq(P)\mathrm{TTC}^q(P)TTCq(P) satisfies the controlled choice constraints and is constrained efficient with respect to PPP.

Significance

Strategy-proofness is what lets a district publish a simple instruction: rank the schools in your true order. A strategy-proof mechanism does not reward families who can afford to gather information and game the system. Proposition 7 shows that this guarantee survives the addition of flexible diversity quotas, which many districts are legally bound to impose. Proposition 6 shows that the quotas cost nothing beyond the losses they themselves cause. Both results were proved in 2003 by pen and paper. The published proof of Proposition 7 is a short adaptation of the proof of Proposition 4 (strategy-proofness of plain TTC). It rests on a lemma about how the algorithm's intermediate states depend on one student's report.

To our knowledge neither result has a machine-checked proof. The related platform theorem AGT.ttc_strategyproof concerns the Shapley–Scarf housing market, where every agent owns one house and the mechanism selects the core. It does not cover capacities, priorities or quotas. A formal proof here would check the adaptation that the paper leaves to the reader, and would give a reusable formal model of cycle-clearing allocation algorithms with multiple counters.

Difficulty

The algorithm clears all cycles of a step at once, and a student's report changes the graph at every step she is present. The paper's argument compares two whole runs of the algorithm, under the true report and under a misreport, step by step. That comparison needs precise control of which parts of the state a single student's report can influence, and when. A local argument about one step does not suffice. The student's outcome can depend on cycles that form several steps after the two runs could first have diverged.

With quotas, the pointing graph also depends on the type counters. A school can be present but closed to one type, and a school points to its best remaining student even when it has no room for her type. The comparison must therefore track the type counters as well as the set of remaining schools. Efficiency cannot be read off step by step against unrestricted matchings either: every competing assignment must satisfy both the capacity and the quota constraints.

Formalization scope

Students, schools and types are finite types; no nonemptiness is assumed. Preferences and priorities are bijective rankings onto Fin, so strictness is built in. Rank 000 is the favourite or the highest priority. The no-shortage condition ∣I∣≤∑sqs|I|\le\sum_s q_s∣I∣≤∑s​qs​ appears in every theorem, as the standing assumption of Section I. No relation between qsq_sqs​ and qstq_s^tqst​ is imposed, which generalises the paper.

The algorithm is a concrete, total definition: a state with remaining students, counters, type counters and partial assignments, a step map that clears all cycles simultaneously, and ∣I∣|I|∣I∣ iterations. run … t is the state at the beginning of the paper's Step t+1t+1t+1.

The paper's step is undefined when a remaining student has no remaining school with room for her type. She cannot point, and the promised cycle may not exist. The formalization adopts one convention: at the beginning of each step, such a stuck student is removed unassigned, and her outcome is ∅\varnothing∅, ranked below every school. Counters only decrease, so a stuck student stays stuck. Whenever nobody gets stuck, the algorithm is exactly the paper's, and when every quota is at least the capacity it is plain TTC. The goal and Proposition 6 are stated for assignments that may leave students unassigned. When everyone is assigned, they coincide with the paper's statements over matchings.

The formalization does not add a hypothesis that the run never gets stuck. Such a hypothesis would restrict the algorithm's own behaviour and could make the theorems vacuous. Nor may strategy-proofness be weakened to comparisons at the truthful profile only: the others' reports and the misreport are arbitrary.

Contributions welcome: invariants of the step map (counters bounded by the initial values, assigned students leave for good), the cycle-existence lemma for functional graphs on finite sets, and the comparison lemma. These pieces are shared with the plain-TTC mission of this series.

Selected references

  • Atila Abdulkadiroğlu and Tayfun Sönmez, School Choice: A Mechanism Design Approach, Columbia University Department of Economics Discussion Paper No. 0203-18, 2003. https://doi.org/10.7916/D8057T27
  • Atila Abdulkadiroğlu and Tayfun Sönmez, School Choice: A Mechanism Design Approach, American Economic Review 93(3), 729–747, 2003. https://doi.org/10.1257/000282803322157061
  • Lloyd Shapley and Herbert Scarf, On Cores and Indivisibility, Journal of Mathematical Economics 1(1), 23–37, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1016/0304-4068(74)90033-0
6 thms2 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 19 of 22Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me